Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW X4 2019-2025
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Dashboard
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
Safety switch 112
Power windows 111
Light switch 174
Lights off
2
Daytime driving lights 176
Parking lights 175
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment button 123
Opening and closing the tailgate
104
Automatic headlight control 174
Adaptive lighting functions 176
5
Lights
Automatic High Beam Assistant
177
30
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Low-beam headlights 175
Instrument lighting 179
Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/off 225
With Steering Assistant 236:
Cruise Control, Distance Control
and lane keeping on/off
Right roadside parking light 175
Left roadside parking light 175
Cruise Control: store the speed
Speed Limit Assistant: accept
suggested speed 233
6
Central locking system 99
Interrupt or continue cruise control
Unlocking
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Locking
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-
tance
7
Seating comfort features
Memory function 125
Cruise Control rocker switch
10 Instrument cluster 154
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection lists 169
8
Turn signal lever
Turn signal 143
High-beam headlights, head-
light flasher 144
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Automatic High Beam Assistant
177
Voice activation system 51
Widgets 156
Trip data 170
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
9
Steering wheel buttons, left
Knurled wheel for selection lists 169
Manual Speed Limiter 220
12 Wiper lever
Depending on the equipment:
Cruise Control on/off 222
31
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Wipers 144
14
Steering wheel heating 125
Rain sensor 145
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 125
16 Unlocking the hood 354
Cleaning the windshield 146
Horn, entire surface
17 Fold-out compartment 297
13
In the vicinity of the center console
1
Control display 46
Hazard warning system 370
5
6
Automatic climate control 271
2
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-
cation 6
Intelligent Safety 184
7
Controller with buttons 47
Parking brake 140
8
3
4
Ventilation 276
Glove compartment 296
32
Dashboard
CONTROLS
9
Automatic Hold 142
12
Auto Start/Stop function 135
Parking assistance systems 243
Panorama View 263
10
Driving Experience Control 138
SPORT drive mode
COMFORT drive mode
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
213
ECO PRO drive mode
HDC Hill Descent Control 215
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 147
11
Turning the drive-ready state
on/off 135
In the vicinity of the headliner
1
Emergency Call, SOS 373
2
Glass sunroof 112
33
Dashboard
CONTROLS
3
4
Indicator light, front passenger
airbag 184
5
Interior lights 179
Reading lights 180
34
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Front camera
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Overview
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
Cameras behind the windshield
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Cameras behind the windshield.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
The cameras behind the windshield are lo-
cated near the interior mirror.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed.
35
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield: if the cam-
Top view cameras
era has overheated and been temporarily
switched off due to excessively high tem-
peratures.
Camera behind the windshield: during cali-
bration of the camera immediately after ve-
hicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
Rearview camera
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
The rearview camera is located between the
license plate lights.
Front radar sensor
System limits of the cameras
The cameras may not be fully operational and
may provide incorrect information in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
The front radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷
When it is dark outside.
36
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Radar sensors, side, front
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear
bumpers
The radar sensors are located to the side in
the front bumper.
The ultrasonic sensors for Park
Distance Control are located in
the front and rear bumpers.
Radar sensors, side, rear
Ultrasonic sensors, side
The radar sensors are located to the side be-
hind the rear bumper.
System limits of the radar sensors
The radar sensors may be restricted or not
available in the following situations:
The ultrasonic sensors for Parking Assistant
are located to the side in the front and rear
bumpers.
▷
▷
If sensors are dirty such as due to icing.
If sensors are covered such as by labels,
films or a number plate baseplate.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
hills, vehicles or trailers.
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
37
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷
▷
For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷
In case of external interference with the
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
For objects with fine surfaces or objects like
fences, plants, or bushes.
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.
With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷
▷
▷
▷
In automatic car washes.
On uneven surfaces such as speed bumps.
Due to heavy exhaust.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
38
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
Safety information
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
General information
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Standby state.
Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Principle
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
39
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Automatic idle state
For instance, the idle state is automatically es-
tablished under the following conditions:
Standby state
Principle
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
When standby state is switched on, most func-
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low-beam headlights are switched
on.
Standby, manual
General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
hicle is automatically set to idle state.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
the driver and front passenger must exit the
vehicle.
Via button on the radio
Press the button on the radio.
The control display and the in-
strument cluster illuminate.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Via start/stop button
Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and the instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
Manual idle state
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
Press and hold the button on
the radio until the OFF indicator
on the instrument cluster goes
out.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
40
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Drive-ready state
NOTICE
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat. There is a risk of property
damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehi-
cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid suc-
cession.
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions such as the Dynamic Stability
Control can only be used with the drive-ready
state turned on.
Safety information
Turning on the drive-ready state
DANGER
Principle
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length
of time.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, full drive
power and the entire rotational speed range
may not be available for approx. 30 seconds
after starting the engine. In this case, the vehi-
cle will not accelerate as usual.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Tachometer, refer to page 166.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
Power gauge, refer to page 166.
41
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
Turning off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
42
iDrive
CONTROLS
iDrive
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Input and display
Main menu
General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
certain functions.
Operating concept
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the Controller.
Media/Radio
Via the control display.
Via the touchpad.
All functions of the entertainment system,
e.g., radio stations or connection with external
devices.
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Via the gesture control.
Communication
Phone and message functions, e-mail
and calendar, and also the connection and
management of mobile devices such as smart-
phones.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
Navigation
Access to the navigation system, desti-
nation input and traffic bulletins. Configurable
map views and other functions such as points
of interest and areas to be avoided.
43
iDrive
CONTROLS
My Car
ery character entered, with characters being
added as necessary.
Information about vehicle status and trips.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range
of adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷
Only those letters and numbers are offered
during entry for which data is available.
Apps
▷
Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
Management of apps, access to apps and
vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle
functions can be purchased from the BMW
Store.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check-
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func-
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func-
tion.
Widgets
Widgets provide quick access to fre-
quently used functions. The configured widg-
ets display dynamic contents such as the nav-
igation map, and serve as interfaces at the
same time.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be selected when
making the destination input, for example.
Status information
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment. The
keyboard's display changes automatically.
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the control display. Status information is dis-
played in the form of icons.
Icon
Function
Telephone icons
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Icon Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
Signal strength of mobile phone net-
work.
Confirm entry.
Network search.
Shift the input area to the left
or right.
Mobile phone network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mobile
phone has been reached.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
selection is gradually narrowed down for ev-
Roaming is active.
Locating is active.
44
iDrive
CONTROLS
Programmable memory buttons
Icon Meaning
SMS text message received.
General information
Message received.
Reminder.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro-
grammable memory buttons and called up di-
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en-
tries.
Sending not possible.
Entertainment icons
Overview
Icon
Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB device.
Connected Music with Spotify.
Wi-Fi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Programmable memory buttons
Satellite radio is switched on.
Storing a function
Other icons
A function can be stored on a programmable
memory button. A button with a stored func-
tion can be overwritten with another function.
Icon Meaning
Check Control message.
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio
station.
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.
Voice activation system active.
Request for the current vehicle position.
Checking the current vehicle position.
Driver profile.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until the displayed bar on the control dis-
play has loaded completely.
Executing a function
Press the button.
Notifications.
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Data protection.
Destination guidance active.
Passengers on board.
Do not disturb.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
45
iDrive
CONTROLS
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in
the upper area of the control display.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Deleting all button assignments
All button assignments can be deleted.
Warning
Objects in the area in front of a display can
slip and damage the display. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Do not
place objects in the area in front of a display.
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same
time.
2. "OK"
Control display and
Controller
Switching on/off automatically
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
Principle
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
Overview
Switching on/off manually
The control display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Screen off"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con-
troller to switch it back on again.
1
Control display
Controller
System limits
2
In the case of very high temperatures on the
control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Control display
Safety information
Warning
Controller
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
46
iDrive
CONTROLS
Operation
Button Function
▷
Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-
ample.
Call up the Media/Radio menu.
Call up the Communication menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu
for navigation.
Call up the previous display.
▷
Press to select a menu item, for example.
Call up the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷
Tilt in four directions to switch between dis-
plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting a menu
Buttons on the Controller
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Button Function
Call up the main menu.
2. Press the Controller.
Go to Apps menu.
47
iDrive
CONTROLS
justed, for instance to remove the entries of
unused functions from the menu
Selecting a widget
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to
the right.
1. Select the menu.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
is selected.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select the desired setting.
3. Press the Controller.
It is also possible to select widgets in the in-
strument cluster.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Settings", a new display appears.
Adjusting the menu
▷
Tilt the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previous
display is shown.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages
with widgets and switch between pages. The
adjustments can only be performed when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷
▷
Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
Tilt the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad-
justed.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can
be opened.
2. Tip the Controller up.
Going to the Options menu
The menu items can be used to access addi-
tional options.
3. "Adjust main menu"
4. Select the desired adjustment:
▷
Icon and select desired widget: add
new widget.
Various options are available depending on
the menu item selected.
The requested widget will be inserted
in the relevant position. A maximum of
four widgets can be displayed per page.
Press the button.
Available options are displayed.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
▷
▷
▷
▷
Select icon: delete selected widget.
Add new page: "Add page".
Delete selected page: "Delete page".
Adjust the content of the widget: select
widget.
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
bers.
5. "Done"
2.
: confirm entry.
Adjusting contents
Depending on vehicle equipment, the contents
of the menus "MEDIA" and "COM" can be ad-
48
iDrive
CONTROLS
Deleting
Entering letters and numbers
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on
the control display.
Icon Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
▷
Always enter associated characters such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
▷
The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 64.
Entering special characters
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
Input
Operation
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
ter.
touchpad.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Operation via touchpad
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch-
pad.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the controller
touchpad.
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the
score.
lower area of the touch-
pad.
Selecting functions
1. "CAR"
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad. Tap the map on the
control display and then continue the operation
using the touchpad.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Touchpad"
Function
Operation
5. Select the desired setting.
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di-
rection.
Display menu. Tap once.
49
iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
Tap icon and select desired widget:
add new widget.
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
The requested widget will be inserted
in the relevant position. A maximum of
four widgets can be displayed per page.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
▷
▷
▷
Tap on the icon.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list.
The widget is made larger.
Tap on the icon.
The widget is made smaller.
Tap on the icon.
Operation via control display
The widget is deleted.
Add new page: tap "Add page".
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the con-
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.
▷
▷
Delete selected page: tap "Delete
page".
You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
not use any objects.
▷
Adjust content of the widget: tap center
of widget.
4. Tap "Done".
Opening the main menu
Showing/hiding the display bar
Tap on the icon.
In the upper area of the control display, it is
possible to show or hide a display bar with
additional functions.
▷
To show the display bar, pull down the dis-
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
▷
To hide the display bar, pull up the display
bar at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
The main menu is displayed.
Adjusting widgets
An arrow indicates that additional displays can
be opened.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages
with widgets and switch between pages. The
adjustments can only be performed when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷
▷
Swipe to the left.
Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad-
justed.
2.
Tap the icon in the main menu.
3. Select the desired adjustment:
50
iDrive
CONTROLS
Entering letters and numbers
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Input
1. Depending on vehicle equipment, either tap
Principle
the
icon on the control display, or a
keyboard is displayed on the control display
when approached.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant simplifies the operation of
the vehicle with the automation of processes
and habits.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
Icon Function
General information
Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or
number.
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version.
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:
deletes all letters or numbers.
▷
The system includes special microphones
on the driver side and the front passenger
side.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
▷
▷
▷
Say commands at a normal volume.
Speaking directly into the microphone does
not improve the speech recognition.
Say the commands and numbers fluently
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
Function
Operation
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin-
gers.
Functional requirements
▷
Display menu.
Tap once.
A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 64.
▷
Always say commands in the configured
system language.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
For the full range of functions, the following
functions should be activated, set or booked:
▷
Online speech processing, refer to
page 54.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
▷
For all settings under
BMW ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
on navigation, entertainment, and commu-
nication.
51
iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Activation word, refer to page 52.
A driver profile.
Preset activation word
The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can
be activated and deactivated.
Synchronize driver profile, refer to
page 72.
1. "CAR"
▷
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
ConnectedDrive Store.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word"
Activating the voice control system
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
7. "Wake word"
Personal activation word
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering
In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set
up in the active driver profile. The personal ac-
tivation word can also be changed or deleted.
wheel.
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
Say the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or a
personal activation word.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addi-
tion such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.
The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the follow-
ing voice control, depending on where the
activation word was spoken.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence. No other commands
may be available. In this case, operate the
function via iDrive.
6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set wake word"
9. Select the desired setting.
Button on the steering wheel
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
Activation word from third-party providers
2. Say the command.
Activation word
General information
Depending on the national-market version,
some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants, e.g. Amazon Alexa.
Supported voice assistants can be used with
a connected smartphone in the vehicle. In ad-
dition to the preset or personal activation word,
Speaking the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or
the personal activation word will start the sys-
tem.
52
iDrive
CONTROLS
the activation word from connected third-party
providers can be used.
Communication
For example, when a mobile phone is con-
nected, calls can be started or SMS can be
sent.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹
›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right
there.‹
6. "Third-party providers"
7. Select the desired setting.
Entertainment
▷
▷
›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹
›Next title.‹
Canceling voice control
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
Climate control
▷
▷
›Turn off the air conditioning.‹
›I'm cold.‹
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹
Tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Press the Controller.
Windows and light
▷
▷
›Open the windows automatically.‹
Possible commands
›Delete activation point for automatic power
window.‹
General information
Most contents on the control display can be
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list
entries. Say list entries as shown.
▷
›Ambient lighting.‹
Owner's Manual via voice operation
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
Instructions can be issued or questions can be
asked where the Personal Assistant provides
support.
The voice activation system and the feed-
back it provides do not replace the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech rec-
ognition and quality of the feedback may vary.
Function examples
›How can the passenger airbag be
deactivated‹
Vehicle status and vehicle information
▷
▷
▷
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
›Show me the sport displays.‹
›Open Owner's Manual.‹
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control
display.
Navigation
▷
›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹
▷
▷
›Take me home.‹
›Are there any traffic messages?‹
53
iDrive
CONTROLS
Menu items
canceled, for instance due to background noise
or conversations in the vehicle.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. "CAR"
1. Activate the voice control system.
2. ›MEDIA‹
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the con-
trol display.
6. "Speaking during voice output"
Help for voice control
Online speech processing
▷
›Voice commands‹: to have the available
spoken commands announced.
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
for points of interest. To use the functions,
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there.
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
▷
›Help‹: have help for the current menu read
out loud.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Settings
Setting the voice control
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
6. "Online speech processing"
The short version of the voice control plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
ance until the desired volume is set.
1. "CAR"
The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
control.
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
1.
Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
54
iDrive
CONTROLS
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated.
Automating routines
General information
2.
Release the button.
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic activation of the
seat heating from a specific outside tempera-
ture. Rules are created for this purpose, which
can be activated and deactivated at any time.
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Principle
Activate/deactivate
1. "APPS"
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-
cle.
2. "Installed apps"
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired setting.
Caring Car
Functional requirement
Principle
▷
A driver profile is activated.
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior
are harmonized for the driver in a short-term
program.
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
General information
By selecting a program, the interior lighting,
air conditioning and music selection will be ad-
justed. A program takes 3 minutes.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the My BMW app and in the vehicle.
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "Amazon Alexa"
4. Select the desired setting.
2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired program.
The program can be stopped prematurely:
"End program"
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
vehicle as follows:
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
sired command.
Adjusting a program
1. "CAR"
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display. If the function
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as
necessary.
2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired program.
4. "Music settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
55
iDrive
CONTROLS
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
that are carried out in the area of the center
console at the height of the control display.
System limits
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
This also applies to safety functions and
systems.
2. "Settings"
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows,
and glass sunroof closed.
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Gesture control"
Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Settings
1. "CAR"
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the speech recognition feature.
2. "Settings"
A poor data connection influences the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. Select the desired setting.
BMW Gesture Control
Carrying out gestures
▷
Perform gestures underneath the interior
mirror and next to the steering wheel.
Principle
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.
▷
▷
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed from
the front-passenger side.
Overview
56
iDrive
CONTROLS
Possible gestures
Gesture
Operation
Move index finger forward and backward in the
Function
Accept call.
direction of the screen.
Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice control.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the control dis-
play in the direction of the front-passenger side.
Reject call.
Close pop-up.
End voice control.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern Increase the volume.
with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular movement.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a cir-
cular pattern with the index finger stretched out
forward.
Reduce the volume.
Gesture is detected after one circular movement.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move
hand horizontally to the right or left.
Surround View: turn camera
view.
This gesture can only be exe-
cuted while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for- Individually assignable ges-
ward.
ture.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back
and forth.
Reverse Skip function.
The previous title is played.
57
iDrive
CONTROLS
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move fist with thumb extended to the right back Forward Skip function.
and forth.
The next title is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch
five fingers out again.
Individually assignable ges-
ture.
▷
The gesture is executed outside of the de-
tection range.
Assigning gesture individually
General information
Two gestures can be assigned individually and
can be configured for certain functions such as:
▷
▷
Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
Smoking in the car's interior.
▷
▷
▷
Destination guidance to home address.
Mute/Playback
Control display on/off
Select function
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
6. Select the desired setting.
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the
headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-
cumstances:
▷
▷
▷
The camera lens is covered.
Objects are located on the interior mirror.
The camera lens is dirty, clean camera
lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
page 382.
58
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Functional requirement
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.
Consent to transmit the corresponding data
was given in the Data Protection menu.
Principle
Additional information:
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
Data protection, refer to page 68.
Search for an upgrade
Functional requirement
Standby must be turned on to search for a
software upgrade.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Safety information
Warning
Manual search
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
59
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
The available data for Remote Software Up-
grade is automatically loaded into the vehicle.
No download consent is required.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
Via BMW app
If an upgrade is available, information about
the new software version is displayed in the
BMW app.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Info about version"
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
The data can then be transmitted from the
mobile device to the vehicle.
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
Installing the upgrade
General information
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to
the smartphone.
▷
▷
▷
The installation of the upgrade may result
in a deletion of software changes, e.g.,
increases in performance that have been
made by parties other than the manufac-
turer of the vehicle.
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
▷
▷
iOS: Connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
Android: connect WLAN.
Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
facturer can lead to an interruption of the
installation.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the
background only while driving.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
The installation may take approx. 20 mi-
nutes.
Additional information:
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer
to page 74.
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
stallation.
▷
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
lation.
Information about the version
The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
General information
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
Prerequisites for the installation
Starting installation
▷
The battery is sufficiently charged.
The upgrade can be installed when all prereq-
uisites have been met.
▷
The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
1. "CAR"
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.
The selector lever position P is engaged.
The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
▷
Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning
is not activated via iDrive.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
requisites on the control display.
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be
offered for installation.
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.
Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.
Horn.
Preparing the vehicle
▷
Alarm system.
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
Emergency call.
Power windows.
Operation of the tailgate.
Glass sunroof.
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent, for
instance if the installation is terminated.
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
Close the glass sunroof.
Close the cargo area.
Remove energy consuming devices such as
a mobile phone.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.
Remove the devices connected to the diag-
nostic socket.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
61
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the BMW
app.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-
est information.
62
General settings
CONTROLS
General settings
Setting the time format
1. "CAR"
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time format:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic time setting
Depending on the vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone
are updated automatically.
Time
Setting the time zone
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Automatic time setting"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Date
Setting the time
1. "CAR"
Setting the date
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time:"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
7. Press the Controller.
8. Make the settings for the month and year.
9. "OK"
8. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
9. "OK"
63
General settings
CONTROLS
the driver. This system supports various vehi-
cle assistance systems, e.g.:
Setting the date format
1. "CAR"
▷
▷
Fatigue alert.
2. "Settings"
Steering and Lane Control Assistant with
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date format:"
Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
5. Select the desired setting.
Language
Setting the system language
1. "CAR"
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
operational in the following situations:
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel rim.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷
When the driver is wearing infrared imper-
meable sunglasses.
Setting the units of
measurement
Trip data settings
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature.
Principle
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset
can be configured.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Resetting trip data
1. "CAR"
3. "General settings"
4. "Units"
2. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset trip data"
5. Select the desired setting.
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
A camera that monitors driver activity is lo-
cated in the instrument cluster. The camera
evaluates the head position and eye opening
and uses the data to analyze the attention of
64
General settings
CONTROLS
Speed warning
Activating/deactivating pop-
ups
Principle
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
automatically on the control display. Some of
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
1. "CAR"
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again after drop-
ping below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting
1. "CAR"
Control display
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Warning above:"
Brightness
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Press the Controller.
7. Press the Controller.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-
ness is set.
2. "Settings"
8. Press the Controller.
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Speed warning"
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Reset vehicle data
Applying current speed as the
speed warning
1. "CAR"
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
switched off. Data can only be deleted while
stationary.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Select current speed"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
65
General settings
CONTROLS
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
portant customer information are displayed as
long as they are relevant.
When the saved settings in a driver profile
are synchronized with the ConnectedDrive ac-
count, these settings will remain in the Con-
nectedDrive account.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select desired notifications.
4.
Press the button.
5. Select the desired setting.
Notifications
Settings
Principle
It is possible to set which notifications are per-
mitted and which notifications will be displayed
at the start of the trip or upon completion of
the trip.
The menu centrally displays all notifications ar-
riving in the vehicle in form of a list.
General information
The following notifications can be displayed:
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic messages.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Check Control messages.
Messages on service notifications.
5. Select the desired setting.
Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
Display, notifications
▷
▷
Messages, for instance from the BMW app.
Messages from the manufacturer of the ve-
hicle, for instance technical information or
important customer information.
General information
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants al-
lows the configuration of the range of mes-
sages that will be displayed. Depending on
the situation, the desired condition can be acti-
vated.
The number of notifications is additionally dis-
played in the status field.
Go to notifications
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select desired notification.
Delete notifications
Notifications can be deleted from the list.
Sustained Check Control messages or mes-
sages from the vehicle manufacturer with im-
66
General settings
CONTROLS
Condition
Description
"Do not
disturb"
Incoming calls and non-criti-
cal notifications are not dis-
played.
Icon is shown in the
status information with the
number of messages.
"Passenger
on board"
Private contents such as
messages will not be dis-
played directly.
Icon is shown in the
status information with the
number of messages.
Activate/deactivate
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Notification display"
5. Select the desired setting.
67
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Personal settings
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
Principle
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Driver profile settings.
Data protection
Stored radio stations.
Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data transfer
Trip computer and on-board computer in-
formation.
Principle
▷
Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
The vehicle offers different services, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.
Office data, for instance voice memos.
Login accounts.
General information
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. When the data transfer is deacti-
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive ac-
count.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Settings
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Deleting data
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Additional information:
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 65.
68
Personal settings
CONTROLS
This option is offered in new vehicle for a
limited period of time.
Driver profiles
As soon as the engine is started or any button
is pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Principle
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multi-
ple drivers, each driver can create his personal
driver profile. When a driver profile is selected,
the vehicle will automatically apply the stored
settings in the driver profile.
Setup assistant
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles
for a limited period of time on the Welcome
screen to configure the most important set-
tings for the vehicle.
"Getting started" Select to start the set-up as-
sistant.
General information
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive
at any time.
In addition, a guest profile is available that can
be selected by any driver. The guest profile is
active when a personal driver profile has not
been selected.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Changes to the vehicle settings are automati-
cally stored in the active driver profile or in the
guest profile.
3. "General settings"
4. "Getting started"
The driver is guided step by step through the
following functions:
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver
when it is unlocked. For this purpose, the rec-
ognition via a vehicle key or a digital key must
be assigned to a driver profile.
▷
▷
Setting the system language.
ConnectedDrive countries:
ConnectedDrive countries:The settings stored
in the driver profile can be synchronized with
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account.
It is thereby possible to use these settings in
other BMW vehicles as well.
If the set-up assistant was opened in the
guest profile: create driver profile.
▷
▷
Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
If the set-up assistant was opened from
an already defined driver profile: set up per-
sonal assistant.
Functional requirements
When a driver profile is created, switched or
deleted, the vehicle must move at a maximum
of walking speed.
▷
Depending on whether the set-up assistant
was opened from an already defined driver
profile or a guest profile: set up services
or confirm the explanation for the transmis-
sion of vehicle related data.
Welcome screen
After the control display is switched on, the
Welcome screen will be displayed.
▷
Set up other methods for use.
The selected settings are stored in the active
driver profile.
The following actions can be carried out on the
Welcome screen:
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated by any
driver. Vehicle settings that are entered when
▷
▷
Switch the driver profile.
Starting the set-up assistant.
69
Personal settings
CONTROLS
the guest profile is active will be stored in the
guest profile.
ConnectedDrive countries:An existing Con-
nectedDrive account must be assigned to
a driver profile. The following options are
available for this purpose:
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-
matically active:
▷
"Via My BMW App"
▷
▷
A driver profile has not been created yet.
Scanning the displayed QR code will ac-
cept the access data for the Connected-
Drive account from the BMW app.
No driver profile has been assigned to the
vehicle key that was used to unlock the ve-
hicle.
▷
▷
"Log in"
▷
No driver profile has been assigned to the
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi-
cle.
The access data must be entered via
iDrive.
The following limitations apply:
"New registration"
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.
Scan the displayed QR code and follow
the instructions on the smartphone.
It is not possible to assign the recognition
to the guest profile.
5. If the vehicle is in the guest profile:
"Transfer current settings"
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
guest profile.
The settings of the guest profile are ap-
plied.
ConnectedDrive countries:It is not possible
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac-
count.
6. ConnectedDrive countries:
"Synchronize driver profile"
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
Future changes to the settings are
synchronized with the BMW Cloud.
1. "CAR"
Selecting recognition
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-
file image can be tapped in the top status
bar.
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. "Guest"
4. "OK"
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Driver recognition"
Creating a driver profile
1. "CAR"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
"with vehicle key"
2. "Driver profiles"
The vehicle key that is recognized in
the vehicle interior is assigned to the
driver profile. If multiple vehicle keys are
detected, the unintended vehicle keys
must be removed from the vehicle inte-
rior.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Add driver profile"
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:A name
must be entered for the driver profile.
▷
"With Digital Key"
70
Personal settings
CONTROLS
The digital key that is recognized in the
vehicle interior is assigned to the driver
profile. If multiple digital keys are de-
tected, the unintended digital keys must
be removed from the vehicle interior.
If no driver profile is assigned to this key,
the guest profile is activated.
Setting up a PIN
A driver profile with recognition cannot be ac-
tivated without vehicle key and without digital
key. In this case, a PIN can be set up to acti-
vate the driver profile.
6. "Activate linkage"
If the vehicle key or the smartphone with the
digital key is not carried with you or not recog-
nized, the driver profile can only be selected on
the Welcome screen when a PIN has been set
up.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail-
able:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not
known, the driver profile cannot be activated.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is availa-
ble:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not
known, the driver profile can be activated with
the access data of the corresponding Connect-
edDrive account.
Automatic recognition
If recognition has been defined, automatic acti-
vation of the driver profile is triggered by the
following activities:
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned
digital key must be carried with you.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned digital key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not
be possible to recognize the digital key.
4. "Driver recognition"
5. "using PIN"
Changing/canceling the recognition
function
When another vehicle key or another digital
key is assigned to a driver profile, the current
assignment must be canceled first.
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
driver profile is done according to the following
priority:
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
activation of the assigned driver profile.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
If the vehicle is unlocked using an unas-
signed key, the guest profile is activated.
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a digital key are de-
tected at the same time, the Digital Key
triggers the activation of the assigned driver
profile.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Driver recognition"
5. Select the desired setting:
If another key is detected on the driver’s
door after activation of the driver profile, the
driver profile of the last key detected is acti-
vated.
▷
▷
"with vehicle key"
"With Digital Key"
6. "Activate linkage"
71
Personal settings
CONTROLS
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be
handed over such as for maintenance, carry
out the following steps first:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat and climate control function.
Exterior lights.
Vehicle access.
▷
▷
▷
Setting up PIN.
Head-up display.
Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.
Switching to the guest profile.
Main menu layout.
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
account is enabled when a driver profile is cre-
ated or via iDrive:
The handed over vehicle key can then no lon-
ger be used to access the personal driver pro-
file.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
Selecting a driver profile
Depending on the recognition setting, the
driver profile will be selected automatically.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile
will be selected on the Welcome screen or via
iDrive. A PIN may have to be entered.
4. "Settings"
5. "Synchronize driver profile"
6. "Synchronize driver profile"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
Renaming a driver profile
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-
file image can be tapped in the top status
bar.
1. "CAR"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
2. "Driver profiles"
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-
file image can be tapped in the top status
bar.
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
are automatically applied.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Settings"
Switching synchronization with the
ConnectedDrive account on/off
Some of the settings saved to a driver pro-
file are synchronized with the personal Con-
nectedDrive account. This enables the use of
these personal settings in other BMW vehicles
with ConnectedDrive access, provided that this
function is supported.
5. Enter a profile name.
6.
Select the icon.
ConnectedDrive countries:
The name of the driver profile is transferred
from the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for
the profile name must be made in the Con-
nectedDrive account.
The following settings are synchronized with
the ConnectedDrive account:
Selecting a profile picture
1. "CAR"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Navigation.
Data protection.
Driver profile and driver assistance.
Language.
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
72
Personal settings
CONTROLS
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
The use of personal settings that are stored in
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles
is subject to technical limitations. For example,
settings may be stored for a system that is
not available, or available in a non-compatible
version, in other vehicles.
4. "Avatar"
5. Select the desired profile picture.
ConnectedDrive countries:
The profile image is transferred from the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.
Deleting the driver profile
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Delete now"
ConnectedDrive countries:If the driver profile
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac-
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive
account will be retained.
System limits
A clear detection of the desired vehicle key
may not be possible in the following cases,
e.g.:
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned driver profile are
located in the outer area on the driver's
side of the vehicle.
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked from the
BMW app.
ConnectedDrive countries:
A driver profile can only be created and
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when the vehicle has cellular network recep-
tion.
73
Connections
CONTROLS
Connections
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle
Principle
General information
Various connection types are available for us-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and the desired function.
The following overview shows possible func-
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The range of functions depends on the
mobile device.
Function
Connection type
Icon in the de-
vice list
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.
tem.
Using phone functions via iDrive or
touchscreen.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or
SMS.
Playing music from the smartphone
or the audio system.
Bluetooth audio.
WLAN in the vehicle:
Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi.
USB.
Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot:
Using the vehicle Internet access.
USB port:
Playing music or videos from a USB
device.
74
Connections
CONTROLS
Function
Connection type
Icon in the de-
vice list
Apple CarPlay:
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Using apps via iDrive and via voice
operation.
Android Auto:
Using apps via iDrive and via voice
operation.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
With a search for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
▷
▷
Bluetooth.
Wi-Fi.
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety information
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷
After one-time pairing, the devices are
automatically recognized and reconnected
when standby state is switched on.
Compatible devices
▷
After stored content on the SIM card or the
mobile phone such as contacts has been
detected, the data is transmitted to the ve-
hicle and can be used via iDrive.
General information
Information on compatible mobile devices is
available as follows:
▷
For some devices, certain settings are nec-
essary, for instance authorization; see the
operating instructions of the device.
▷
▷
▷
On the BMW homepage.
Via Hotline/Customer Support
At an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the ve-
hicle are displayed in the device list.
75
Connections
CONTROLS
A maximum of four devices can be connected
to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, and a maximum
of ten devices can be connected to the vehicle
via Wi-Fi.
The device remains paired and can be
connected again.
▷
▷
"Delete device"
The device is disconnected and re-
moved from the device list.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
"Connection mode"
An icon to the right of the device name indi-
cates, for which function the device is used.
Select a connection mode, for instance
Apple CarPlay.
When the icon is displayed in white, this func-
tion is actively connected to the vehicle. The
icon is displayed in gray when the function of
the device is inactive.
▷
▷
"Telephone"
Set telephone.
"Bluetooth® audio"
Playback of music files on external de-
vices such as audio devices or mobile
phones via Bluetooth®.
Icon Meaning
Telephone.
▷
▷
"Apps"
Bluetooth audio.
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot.
Apps.
With the installed BMW app, apps from
the smartphone can be displayed in the
vehicle.
"Wi-Fi®"
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Connects the device with the WLAN in
the vehicle.
Priority of the phones
Configuring the device
When multiple mobile phones are connected
to the vehicle, you can specify the priority of
the mobile phones. The mobile phone with the
highest priority is preferred, for instance for
outgoing calls and messages.
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
The range of functions depends on the mobile
device.
Observe the information on the control display.
1. "COM"
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
3. Select the desired device.
4. Select the desired setting:
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.
▷
"Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to
the device before disconnecting are as-
signed to the device when it is recon-
nected. The functions may be deacti-
vated on a device already connected.
▷
"Disconnect device"
76
Connections
CONTROLS
Frequently Asked Questions
Bluetooth connection
All prerequisites are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
Functional requirements
▷
Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.
Compatible devices, refer to page 75.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
▷
The vehicle key or BMW display key is in
the vehicle.
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷
▷
The device is ready for operation.
Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and
on the device.
▷
There are too many Bluetooth devices con-
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
▷
▷
The pairing readiness is displayed on the
control display.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
Bluetooth default settings such as for visi-
bility may be required on device, refer to
your device operating instructions.
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the
device list on the mobile phone and start a
new device search.
Too many Bluetooth devices are paired
with the same function. Adapt the functions
in the device list on the control display.
Activate Bluetooth
1. "COM"
▷
The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate
the power-save mode where required.
5. "Bluetooth®"
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
6. Select setting.
▷
The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Connecting the device
1. "COM"
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷
Too high or too low ambient temperature
for mobile phone operation.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
treme ambient temperatures.
5. "Phone calls and audio"
Why can telephone functions not be used via
iDrive?
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
on the control display.
▷
Phone functions are not configured for the
mobile phone.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
the control display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and
confirm that the two match.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
phone function.
Why are no or not all telephone book entries
displayed or why are they incomplete?
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
77
Connections
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Transmission of the telephone book entries
is not yet complete.
WLAN connection
It is possible that only the telephone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
General information
For certain applications such as apps, the data
exchange between smartphone and vehicle
occurs via WLAN.
▷
▷
▷
▷
It may not be possible to display telephone
book entries with special characters.
It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
Functional requirements
▷
Standby state is switched on.
The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high.
▷
Compatible device with activated WLAN in-
terface.
Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
memos.
Activate WLAN in the vehicle
1. "COM"
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
▷
▷
The mobile phone has only been connected
as an audio source.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone function.
5. "Wi-Fi®"
Contact was created in the contact list of
the phone after the last synchronization.
Wi-Fi hotspot
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload
contacts"
Principle
How can the telephone connection quality be
improved?
Compatible devices with WLAN interface can
use the Internet connection of the vehicle via
the Wi-Fi hotspot.
▷
Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal
on the mobile phone, depending on the
mobile phone.
General information
Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-
Fi hotspot simultaneously.
▷
▷
Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa-
rately in the sound settings.
Functional requirements
If all points listed have been checked and the
required function is still not available: contact
the hotline, an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
▷
Compatible device with activated WLAN in-
terface.
Compatible devices, refer to page 75.
WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷
▷
▷
Registration and data contract with a serv-
ice provider where required.
▷
Standby state is switched on.
78
Connections
CONTROLS
Connecting a device to the Internet
via the Wi-Fi hotspot
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi-
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a
data volume purchase from a service provider.
Deactivating Internet usage via the
Wi-Fi hotspot
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance.
1. "COM"
Depending on the national-market version,
data volume can be purchased via the con-
nected mobile communication device or from
the ConnectedDrive Store.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Wi-Fi hotspot"
1. "COM"
6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
Apple CarPlay©
5. "Internet, apps"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis-
played on the control display.
Principle
CarPlay allows select functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control
and iDrive.
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces-
sary.
"Open settings"
Functional requirements
7. Activate Internet usage.
"Wi-Fi hotspot"
▷
Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later with
iOS 9.3 or later.
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.
Compatible devices, refer to page 75.
Corresponding mobile contract.
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile
device. Select network name on the device.
▷
▷
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control are
activated on the iPhone.
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con-
nect.
▷
▷
If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.
The device is displayed in the device list.
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on
the control display. Alternatively, this QR code
can be used to pair the mobile device with the
hotspot.
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-
hicle.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
1. "COM"
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
data volume.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
on the control display.
79
Connections
CONTROLS
6. On the mobile device, search for nearby
Bluetooth devices and select the vehicle.
Android Auto©
A control number is displayed.
Principle
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the control display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and
confirm that the two match.
Android Auto allows select functions of a com-
patible smartphone to be operated via Goo-
gle Assistant voice control and via iDrive.
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"
General information
The range of services offered depends on the
country.
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
Functional requirements
▷
Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or
an Android smartphone with Android 11, re-
gardless of the manufacturer.
Frequently Asked Questions
▷
▷
▷
Compatible devices, refer to page 75.
Corresponding mobile contract.
All prerequisites are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the
smartphone.
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone must support a Wi-Fi con-
nection with 5 GHz.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the smartphone.
The iPhone has already been paired with
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is set
up, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-
hicle.
▷
Delete the iPhone concerned from the de-
vice list.
Pairing a smartphone with Android
Auto
1. "COM"
▷
On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-
cerned from the list of stored connections
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
▷
Pair the iPhone as a new device.
2. "Mobile devices"
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: con-
tact the hotline, an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
on the control display.
6. On the mobile device, search for nearby
Bluetooth devices and select the vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
80
Connections
CONTROLS
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the control display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and
confirm that the two match.
▷
Mobile phones.
▷
▷
Audio devices such as MP3 players.
USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
8. "Use Android Auto"
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile
device.
A connected USB device will be supplied with
charge current via the USB port if the device
supports this. Follow the maximum charge
current of the USB port.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
The following uses are possible on USB ports
with data transfer:
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷
▷
Playing music files.
Playing videos.
Follow the following when connecting:
Frequently Asked Questions
▷
Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB port.
All prerequisites are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
▷
▷
Use a flexible adapter cable.
Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guar-
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
The smartphone has already been paired with
Android Auto. When a new connection is set
up, Android Auto can no longer be selected.
Do not expose USB devices to extreme en-
vironmental conditions such as very high
temperatures, refer to the operating in-
structions of the device.
▷
Delete the smartphone concerned from the
device list.
▷
On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con-
cerned from the list of stored connections
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB device cannot be guar-
anteed in all cases.
▷
Pair the smartphone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: con-
tact the hotline, an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB device
via the onboard socket, when it is con-
nected to the USB port.
Depending on how the USB device is be-
ing used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the operating
instructions of the device.
USB connection
General information
The following mobile devices can be con-
nected to the USB port:
Not compatible USB devices:
81
Connections
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
USB hard drives.
USB hubs.
USB memory card readers with multiple
slots.
▷
▷
HFS-formatted USB devices.
Devices such as fans or bulbs.
Functional requirement
Compatible device with USB port.
Additional information:
Compatible devices, refer to page 75.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB port.
The USB device is displayed in the device list.
Additional information:
USB port, refer to page 291.
82
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
Safety information
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Vehicle key
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the
scope of delivery includes two vehicle keys or
one vehicle key and the BMW display key.
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
A driver profile with personal settings can be
assigned to a vehicle key.
Warning
To provide information on maintenance rec-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
the vehicle key.
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Warning
▷
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-
locked when the button is pressed for the
first time.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷
▷
If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
If the welcome light is switched on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Welcome lights, refer to page 175.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Unlocking the vehicle
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
Overview
▷
If a driver profile has been assigned to the
vehicle key, this driver profile will be acti-
vated and the settings that are saved in it
will be applied.
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the vehicle interior, they will not
be folded out during unlocking.
1
Unlocking
▷
▷
With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec-
tion is switched off.
2
Locking
Pre-conditioning 281
To open the tailgate
Panic mode, pathway lighting
With alarm system: The alarm system will
be switched off.
3
4
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Unlocking
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking
using the vehicle key depends on the following
settings:
84
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
protection are opened, as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
Locking
Warning
General information
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during convenient closing.
The behavior of the vehicle during locking us-
ing the vehicle key depends on the following
settings:
▷
If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷
If the exterior mirrors are automatically
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
hazard warning flashers are switched on.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
key in close range to the vehicle after
locking.
▷
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-
ing.
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
protection are closed, as long as the button on
the vehicle key is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir-
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
flashers are switched on.
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
The following functions are executed:
▷
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
Switching on the interior and
exterior lighting
▷
With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec-
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock buttons
or the door openers.
Press the button on the vehicle key with
the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec-
onds after locking.
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will
be switched on.
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop
button.
Interior lights, refer to page 179.
▷
Depending on the settings, parts of the ex-
terior lighting will be switched on.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Tailgate
Switching pathway lighting on
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path-
way lighting feature.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the
vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will re-
spond to this.
Additional information:
Pathway lighting, refer to page 176.
Replacing the battery
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the tailgate with the vehicle key.
NOTICE
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk
of property damage. Always replace the dis-
charged battery with a battery with the same
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-
cation.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is
clear during opening and closing.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Integrated key, refer to page 97.
Warning
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the lid with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the tailgate is clear during opening
and closing.
Warning
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heating elements while driving.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that
pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
86
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a
pointed object and lift it out.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3 V battery with the
positive side facing up.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
5. Press the lid closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
until the integrated key engages.
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It
is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-
teries together with household waste.
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key.
Additional information:
Loss of vehicle keys
Integrated key, refer to page 97.
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver
profile, the connection to this vehicle key must
be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be as-
signed to the driver profile.
87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Switching the drive-ready state on via
emergency detection of the vehicle key
BMW display key
General information
Depending on the country, the BMW display
key may not be available.
In this case, independent heating can be oper-
ated via the BMW app.
The scope of delivery of the BMW display key
includes an additional mechanical key. If the
display key is used, the mechanical key should
be carried with you, for instance in the wallet.
The mechanical key is used like the integrated
key.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
The display key supports all functions of the
standard vehicle key.
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
mark on the steering column. Pay attention
to the display in the instrument cluster.
In addition, the following functions are also
available:
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Display status of doors and windows.
Display status of the alarm system.
Display service information.
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
change the position of the vehicle key and re-
peat the procedure.
Call up range with available fuel.
With pre-heating: operate pre-heating.
Without pre-heating: operate pre-ventila-
tion.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
▷
Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine
Start
Additional information:
▷
The options provided by the Remote Serv-
ices of the BMW app include the ability to
lock and unlock a vehicle.
Integrated key, refer to page 97.
Safety information
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract and the BMW app must be
installed on a smartphone.
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
88
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Overview
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
1
To open the tailgate
Unlocking
2
3
Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Warning
Press briefly: pathway lighting
Locking
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
4
5
6
7
Display
Back
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Turn the display on/off
Micro-USB charging interface
Releasing the parking brake.
8
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
▷
When you are in close proximity to the ve-
hicle, all functions of the display key are
available.
▷
The status information can be called up in
the extended reception range.
With pre-heating: the pre-heating can be
operated.
NOTICE
Without pre-heating: the pre-ventilation can
be operated.
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
▷
Outside of the reception range of the ve-
hicle, you can display the last transmitted
status information from the vehicle.
The icon is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Hiding the display on the display manually:
press the button on the left side of the display
key.
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area, and the lower status
line.
To show the display:
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis-
play key.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following
information:
To turn off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
▷
/
Vehicle secured/vehicle unse-
1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
cured.
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
▷
▷
Set time in the vehicle.
Charge state of the display key battery.
3. "OK"
To turn the display on:
Information area
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
The information area can be used to access
information and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
Operating concept
The following information shows how to ac-
cess the information and functions using the
main menus.
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
change between the pages.
Main menu
Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
If further information is available on a page,
tap the appropriate icon.
Door status.
Alarm system status.
To return to the original page:
icon beneath the display.
tap on the
After alarm activation:
date, time, and reason
for the alarm activation.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range.
Window status.
▷
"Connected": the display key is within re-
ception range.
Glass sunroof status.
"Vehicle
information"
Service interval indicators
of Condition Based Serv-
ice.
▷
"Updated": the display key is not within re-
ception range. It indicates when the last
data transfer from the vehicle took place.
Status of the roadside
parking lights.
Turning on/off
The display will go out automatically after a
short time to conserve battery power.
90
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
and in isolated cases the charging process
may be interrupted temporarily.
Main menu
Information/Function
"Mobility info"
Range with available fuel.
▷
When inserting the display key into the
wireless charging tray, make sure there
are no objects between it and the wireless
charging tray.
"Preconditioning With pre-heating: operate
setting"
pre-heating.
Without pre-heating: op-
erate pre-ventilation.
Safety information
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start.
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-
tion correctly when placed together on the
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. When charging
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-
jects on the tray together with the device.
Display key battery
General information
Follow the following information:
▷
If the charge state of the display key battery
declines, the display is switched off auto-
matically. The battery must be recharged
so that the display can be switched back
on. The operability of the standard buttons
is retained until the battery is completely
discharged.
▷
▷
▷
Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first
time or if the key has not been used for an
extended period.
Charging
Via USB
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging interface to a USB port.
The Display Key can be used during charg-
ing via the USB port.If the battery is com-
pletely discharged, it may take some time
before the Display Key can be used again.
In the center console
Due to the large number of USB charg-
ers available on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that every charger will function
properly. The charging time depends on the
charger used.
▷
Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
heat up the tray and the display key.
1. Open the tray cover.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
through the display key may be reduced,
2. Place the display key into the middle of the
wireless charging tray in front of the cup
holders.
91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
LED displays
Turning on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
Color Meaning
Blue
The display key is charging.
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Or-
The display key is not charging.
ange
Temperature on the display key
possibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
Red
The display key is not charging.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Contact an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the display key with its rear against
the mark on the steering column. Pay at-
tention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
2. If the display key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
If the display key is not detected, slightly
change the position of the display key and re-
peat the procedure.
▷
The battery of the display key is dis-
charged.
▷
Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be turned on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
▷
▷
Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity.
Press and hold the following buttons on the
display key at the same time for at least
10 seconds until the display is switched off and
then on again:
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
▷
92
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Key Card
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
General information
The availability of the Key Card depends on
the equipment and the country.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Connection to the vehicle
The communication between the vehicle and
the Key Card uses near field communication,
NFC.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in
the vehicle
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
General information
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Functional requirement
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
Turning on the drive-ready state
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Activating Key Card
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-
phone tray.
3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play to activate the Key Card.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
Deactivating Key Card
1. "CAR"
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of
the smartphone tray.
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-
gine.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Digital Key"
With wireless charging tray:After starting the
engine, take the Key Card out of the tray to
make tray available for charging compatible
smartphones.
5. Select Key Card.
6. "Key Card active"
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Malfunction
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key
Card if there are objects between the smart-
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or
smartphone case.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
BMW Digital Key
Principle
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-
ter of the driver's door handle.
General information
The availability of the BMW Digital Key de-
pends on the equipment and national-market
version.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
procedure.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices such as a Smartwatch.
94
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app
provides a check to determine if the smart-
phone and the vehicle are compatible.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
A driver profile with individual settings can be
assigned to a digital key.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Additional information:
Releasing the parking brake.
Driver profiles, refer to page 69.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al-
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to
be handed over to another person. You can
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card
instead of your smartphone. Always take the
vehicle key with you to a service appointment.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Connection to the vehicle
The communication between the vehicle and
the smartphone uses near field communica-
tion, NFC.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Authentication
Enabling the main digital key
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
model, an authentication may be required for
security and safety reasons.
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
hicle for this purpose.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method may be used for authenti-
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions
on the smartphone or the control display.
The proof of authorization can be started via
the BMW app or the activation code in the
corresponding smartphone function, e.g., the
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be located
in the vehicle to be enabled.
Deleting a shared key
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu
in the BMW app or on the control display.
General information
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-
phone with the main digital key, via the smart-
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.
Sharing digital keys
General information
The deletion via the smartphone using the
main digital key will not be performed until the
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deletion via iDrive
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an
authorized vehicle key must be located in the
vehicle or the main key must be located in the
smartphone tray.
1. "CAR"
Limiting the range of functions
2. "Settings"
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
digital key is passed on to a novice driver, the
switch-off for driving stability control systems
can be disabled and the engine power can
be reduced. For more information, refer to the
ConnectedDrive portal and the BMW app.
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. "Delete key"
Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
96
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
Sale of the smartphone
all digital keys including the main digital key
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is
retained and deactivated.
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
The main digital key must be enabled again to
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Reset function"
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key
is retained and deactivated.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
System limits
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off
with a digital key.
Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 109.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at
the center of the driver's door handle.
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
The position of the near field communication
antenna depends on the smartphone model.
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and also the tailgate
are closed.
▷
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
Integrated key
2. Place smartphone in the center of the
smartphone tray.
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated
key.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-
gine.
97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key also fits in the glove compart-
ment.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
Safety information
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from
the back under the cover cap and push the
cover cap out.
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-
vent the cover cap from falling out of the
door handle.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated
key inserted, paint or the integrated key can
be damaged. There is a risk of property dam-
age. Remove the integrated key before pull-
ing the external door handle.
3. Remove the cover cap.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
98
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
Opening
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be
activated.
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the
door to open the door. The other doors re-
main locked.
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener
on the door to be opened; the first time
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Comfort Access
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
Overview
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle
key when it is in close proximity or in the inte-
rior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
Buttons for the central locking system.
▷
Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
door handle.
▷
▷
Convenient closing.
Locking
Touchless unlocking and locking of the ve-
hicle.
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷
Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
BMW Digital Key.
▷
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
▷
▷
Open the tailgate.
Contactless trunk opening and closing.
Unlocking
Press the button.
99
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec-
tion is switched off.
Functional requirements
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will
be switched off.
▷
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Locking
Unlocking
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via
the Comfort Access depends on the following
settings:
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking
via the Comfort Access depends on the follow-
ing settings:
▷
If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷
If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷
If the exterior mirrors are automatically
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
hazard warning flashers are switched on.
▷
If the welcome light is switched on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
▷
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-
ing.
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
Close the driver's door.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
▷
If a driver profile was assigned to the vehi-
cle key, this driver profile will be activated
and the settings that are stored in it will be
applied.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
The following functions are executed:
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
▷
With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec-
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the interior, they will not be folded
out when unlocking.
100
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
from being unlocked using the lock buttons
or the door openers.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will
be switched on.
Safety information
Convenient closing
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is
clear during opening and closing.
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during convenient closing.
Warning
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the tailgate is clear during opening
and closing.
Closing
Warning
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heating elements while driving.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that
pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
Opening
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir-
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
flashers are switched on.
Opening the tailgate
Press the button on the outer side of the tail-
gate.
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
101
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing the tailgate
with no-touch activation
Warning
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the tailgate is clear during opening
and closing.
Principle
The trunk can be opened and closed contact-
less using the vehicle key you are carrying.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
movement in the central rear area and the tail-
gate is opened and closed.
Warning
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heating elements while driving.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that
pointed objects do not hit the windows.
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tail-
gate may open or close inadvertently if you un-
intentionally move your foot or if a foot move-
ment is detected.
Functional requirements
Selector lever position P must be engaged for
touchless opening of the tailgate.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
If contactless opening of the tailgate is acti-
vated, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
Contactless trunk opening and closing must be
activated in the settings.
Safety information
Settings
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate
can be switched on or off.
Warning
With hands-free opening of the cargo area,
there may be unintentional contact with vehi-
cle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is
a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch
the vehicle.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Tailgate"
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is
clear during opening and closing.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
direction and immediately pull it back. With
102
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Touchless unlocking and locking of
the vehicle
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the tailgate opens, the hazard warning
system flashes.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the door handles.
Moving your foot again will stop the opening
procedure, and moving it one more time after
that will close the tailgate.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/2 m around the door handles.
Closing
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing
motion, and moving it one more time after that
will re-open the tailgate.
If a passenger is detected in the front pass-
enger seat and the front passenger seat belt
is engaged when the vehicle is locked, the fol-
lowing restrictions apply:
System limits
The detection of the foot movement may be
limited due to the following external conditions:
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless
unlocking/locking depends on the following
settings:
Movement in the range of the sensors may
cause unintended opening or closing of the
cargo area, for instance due to water running
down when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy
rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening
or closing of the cargo area in such cases,
keep the vehicle key at a sufficient distance
from the rear of the vehicle.
▷
▷
▷
If the automatic unlocking is active.
If the automatic locking is active.
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-
locked.
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the
driver's door and fuel filler flap will only be
103
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
unlocked when the driver approaches the
vehicle on the driver's side.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be
unlocked regardless of the side on which
the driver approaches the vehicle.
▷
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
▷
If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle
is confirmed with a light signal or a sound
signal.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the door handles.
▷
▷
▷
If the welcome light is switched on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
or use the integrated key.
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-
ing.
If the exterior mirrors are automatically
folded out and in when the vehicle is un-
locked and locked.
Additional information:
Integrated key, refer to page 97.
Functional requirements
Tailgate
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.
▷
Unlocking: when entering the unlocking
zone, the doors and tailgate must be
closed.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
▷
▷
Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and tailgate must be closed.
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the tailgate with the vehicle key.
For contactless locking of the vehicle, no
second vehicle key may be within a radius
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, it is possible to specify whether
the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle
key and how the vehicle doors will function.
▷
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 108.
Safety information
Malfunction
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is
clear during opening and closing.
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
For replacing the battery, refer to page 86.
▷
Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
104
Opening and closing
From the inside
CONTROLS
Warning
Press the button in the driver's door
downward.
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the tailgate is clear during opening
and closing.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
The tailgate will be opened to the configured
opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure
Warning
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heating elements while driving.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that
pointed objects do not hit the windows.
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.
By pressing the button on the outer side
of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
Tailgate
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing again continues the opening pro-
cedure.
Opening
From the outside
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening procedure.
Closing
From the outside
▷
Press the button on the inside of
the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the outer side of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the outer
side of the tailgate.
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the vehicle key must
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
105
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
be outside of the vehicle in the area of the
tailgate.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
From the inside
Valet parking mode
Pull and hold the button in the driver
door.
Principle
The vehicle key must be located in the interior
for this function.
In the valet parking mode, the control display is
disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer
possible.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
closed.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-
lowing situations:
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible
to change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal
profiles cannot be changed. Personal data
cannot be displayed.
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
ment.
▷
By pressing the button on the outer side
of the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the
tailgate.
Additionally, the following actions are carried
out:
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tail-
gate.
▷
▷
The volume of the audio system is limited.
The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion.
▷
The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be
turned off.
Functional requirements
Malfunction
▷
▷
▷
At least one driver profile has been created.
Safety information
A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
At least one driver profile has an assigned
ConnectedDrive account.
Warning
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate,
it can release itself unexpectedly from the
blocking. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Do not operate the tail-
gate manually if it is blocked. Have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Accessing the menu for the valet
parking mode
Via the switch-off screen
After switching off drive-ready state the
switch-off screen will be displayed. Select the
entry for the valet parking mode on the switch-
off screen.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
106
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
This PIN can be used once to deactivate
the valet parking mode for the active guest
profile.
Via the display bar at the upper edge
of the control display
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Valet parking mode"
Deactivating valet parking mode
Via the vehicle settings
1. "CAR"
General information
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is
displayed on the control display.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de-
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
lock screen.
Activating the valet parking mode
Driver profile with PIN
General information
Before activating the valet parking mode, a
PIN must be set up to be able to deactivate
the valet parking mode at a future time.
Regardless of which driver activated the valet
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
1. Select driver profile.
The procedure for the PIN input varies de-
pending on the active driver profile.
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
must be deactivated by entering the assigned
ConnectedDrive access data.
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been stored for the active driver
profile.
Driver profile without PIN
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
"Activate now"
The valet parking mode was activated by an-
other person. To deactivate the valet parking
mode, a driver without a PIN has to enter the
access data for his ConnectedDrive account.
Driver profile without PIN
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as-
signed to the driver profile.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
3. "Activate now"
Guest profile
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode
was activated in the guest profile.
Guest profile
The guest profile is the active driver profile.
A PIN must be entered.
1. Select guest profile.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during ac-
tivation.
2. Enter PIN.
3. "Activate now"
107
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet park-
ing mode must be deactivated via a personal
driver profile.
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Folding mirrors in automatically
1. "CAR"
Settings
2. "Settings"
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible.
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
Automatic unlocking
1. "CAR"
These settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
Unlocking and locking
Doors
1. "CAR"
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
2. "Settings"
3. "Key button settings"
Automatic locking
1. "CAR"
4. Select the icon.
5. Select the desired setting:
2. "Settings"
▷
"Driver's door only"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Lock in a few minutes"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-
locks the entire vehicle.
The vehicle locks automatically after a short
period of time if no door is opened after
unlocking.
▷
"All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "CAR"
Tailgate and doors
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, this setting may not be of-
fered.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma-
tion signals:
1. "CAR"
▷
"Flash when locking/unlocking"
2. "Settings"
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,
locking by flashing once.
3. "Key button settings"
4.
5. Select the desired setting:
"Tailgate"
Select the icon.
▷
With alarm system:
"Sound when locking/unlocking"
▷
108
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Depending on the vehicle's optional fea-
tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or
opened.
Establishing idle state after opening
the front doors
1. "CAR"
▷
"Tailgate opens only when vehicle is
unlocked."
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Idle state, refer to page 39.
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the tailgate can be used with the vehicle
key.
▷
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on the vehicle's optional fea-
tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or
opened and the doors unlocked.
Alarm system
Principle
"Lock tailgate button"
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
The operation of the tailgate via the ve-
hicle key is disabled.
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate can be
opened.
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
When adjusting the opening height, make sure
the clearance above the tailgate is at least
4 in/10 cm.
▷
▷
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate.
Movements in the interior.
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Tailgate"
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
board diagnostics.
5. "Opening height"
6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the diagnostic socket.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
Comfort Access
▷
Acoustic alarm:
Touchless locking and unlocking
Contactless locking and unlocking can be
switched on or off.
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷
Optical alarm:
1. "CAR"
By flashing of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Comfort access"
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
109
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The alarm system is switched on.
Turning on/off
The alarm system is turned on or off as soon
as the vehicle is locked or unlocked with the
vehicle key or via Comfort Access.
▷
Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec-
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec-
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked
and monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
An alarm has been deployed.
Tilt alarm sensor
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Interior motion sensor
The vehicle interior is monitored.
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
three times in succession.
The alarm system responds when movement
is detected in the vehicle interior.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
thorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷
▷
In car washes.
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
In duplex garages.
110
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
stance when the same parking garage is fre-
quently used.
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.
Additional information:
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
fueling.
▷
▷
Vehicle key, refer to page 83.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 51.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Safety information
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Warning
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury and risk of property damage. Make sure
that the travel path of the windows is clear
while opening and closing.
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Overview
Ending the alarm
▷
Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
▷
Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and activate the drive-ready state via emer-
gency detection of the vehicle key.
Malfunction, refer to page 87.
▷
With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve-
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front
passenger door handle completely.
Power windows
Safety switch
Power windows
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the fol-
lowing conditions.
General information
The windows can be opened with the vehicle
key from the outside as well as closed with
Comfort Access.
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
With Comfort Access: The windows can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
When a window is frequently opened to the
same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For in-
111
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing without the anti-trap
Opening
▷
mechanism
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
The window opens while the switch is be-
ing held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
The window closes with limited anti-trap
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes while the switch is be-
ing held.
The window closes without the anti-trap
mechanism.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
Safety switch
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo-
tion.
Principle
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-
dren, for instance, from opening and closing
the rear windows using the switches in the
rear.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
body parts becoming jammed between the
door frame and window while a window is be-
ing closed.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Turning on/off
Press the button.
General information
If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
The LED illuminates if the safety func-
tion is switched on.
Glass sunroof
Safety information
General information
Warning
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in
the area of movement of the windows.
The glass sunroof can be opened from the
outside with the vehicle key and also closed
with Comfort Access.
112
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can
be closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
▷
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts and the sun
protection opens slightly.
The opened glass sunroof closes until it
is in the tilted position. The sun protection
does not move.
Safety information
▷
The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and
closing.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
and sun protection separately
▷
Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
Overview
▷
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-
tection closes.
Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
Opening/closing the glass sun-
roof/sun protection.
The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can
be operated under the following conditions.
▷
Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in
the tilted position, the sun protection closes
automatically.
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
113
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing from the open position without
the anti-trap mechanism
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
and sun protection together
▷
Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and sun
protection open together.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
1. Close all doors.
▷
Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-
sion toward the front past the resistance
point.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited anti-
trap mechanism. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
The glass sunroof and sun protection close
together.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
3. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without the anti-trap mech-
anism. Make sure that the closing path is
clear.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is
not fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
Closing from the lifted position without
the anti-trap mechanism
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
body parts from becoming jammed between
the roof frame and glass sunroof while the
glass sunroof is closing.
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
General information
If a resistance or blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-
ing from the tilted position.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power interruption during the opening
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only
114
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the
system can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
▷
▷
The drive-ready state is established.
The outside temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without the anti-trap mechanism.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold
it until the initialization is com-
plete:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-
roof and sun protection have opened then
closed again.
115
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
the protective effect of the seat belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
ing.
Sitting safely
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the in-
formation in the following chapters.
Additional information:
Electrically adjustable seats
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 116.
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Seat belts, refer to page 118.
Head restraints, refer to page 121.
Airbags, refer to page 181.
Overview
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Only adjust the
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is
stationary.
1
Backrest width
2
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
116
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Backrest tilt
3
4
Backrest tilt, head restraint
Lumbar support
Longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Calibrating the front seats
Press switch forward or backward.
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
Height
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
Press switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Calibrating the front seat
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
ward until the seat stops.
2. Press the switch forward again until the
seat stops.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration.
Tilt switch up or down.
117
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
If this message is still shown after repeated
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
Thigh support
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Sport seat
Adjusting
▷
▷
Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de-
creases.
Press the rear section of the
button:
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
The backrest width in-
creases.
Lumbar support
Functional limitation
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
width at very high and very low temperatures.
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
Seat belts
Adjusting
General information
▷
▷
Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-
sure occupant safety. However, the seat belts
can only offer protection when adjusted cor-
rectly.
The curvature is in-
creased/decreased.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
Press the upper/lower sec-
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
All belt fastening points are designed to ach-
ieve the best possible protective effect of the
seat belts with proper use of the seat belts and
correct seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, re-
fer to page 116.
Functional limitation
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
support at very high and very low tempera-
tures.
118
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
▷
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders
were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat
belts checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Correct use of seat belts
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
or fragile objects.
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,
the protective effect of the middle seat belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail
in the following situations:
119
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
Buckling the seat belt
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
The indicator light illuminates and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the seat
belts are positioned correctly. The seat
belt reminder can also be activated if objects
are placed on the front passenger seat.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Seat belt reminder for rear seats
General information
The seat belt reminder is automatically acti-
vated each time the engine starts.
The seat belt reminder is also activated when
a passenger unbuckles a rear seat belt during
the trip.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after the engine is started.
When the seat belt is fastened, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt straps are au-
tomatically tightened once after driving away.
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment version and country variant.
Icon
Description
Unbuckling the seat belt
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
Green: the seat belt is buckled
on the corresponding rear seat.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt
winder.
Seat belt reminder for driver’s seat
and passenger’s seat
Red: the seat belt is not buck-
led on the corresponding rear
seat.
General information
The seat belt reminder is issued when the driv-
er's side seat belt is not buckled.
The seat belt reminder is also active when the
front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob-
jects are on the front passenger seat.
Safety mode
In critical driving situations, for instance during
full braking, the front seat belts tighten auto-
matically.
The seat belt reminder is also activated when
a passenger unbuckles a seat belt during the
trip.
If the driving situation passes without an acci-
dent occurring, the belt tension relaxes.
120
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
If the belt tension does not loosen automati-
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat
belt using the red button in the seat belt
buckle. Fasten the seat belt before continuing
to drive.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Adjusting the height
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
Adjusting distance
For manually adjustable head restraints:
After adjusting, make sure that the head
restraint is correctly engaged.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
▷
▷
Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Warning
Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
121
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
For manually adjustable head restraints:
After adjusting, make sure that the head
restraint is correctly engaged.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
Folding down the center head
restraint
To improve the view to the rear, the center
head restraint can be folded to the rear. Only
push the head restraint down if no one will be
sitting in the center seat.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
122
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Exterior mirrors
General information
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently in use. When a driver profile is
selected, the saved position is called up auto-
matically.
▷
▷
To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint backward.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function.
Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Safety information
Adjusting the height
Warning
The height of the head restraints cannot be
set.
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-
pear. The distance to the road users behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate
the distance to the traffic behind by looking
over your shoulder.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Overview
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in ques-
tion.
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 304.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
1
Adjusting
2
3
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
Folding in and out
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Press the button.
123
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The selected mirror moves along with the but-
ton movement.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Activating
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Folding in and out
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
exterior mirror position.
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Interior mirror, manually
dimmable
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
▷
▷
In car washes.
On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir-
ror, flip the lever forward.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Photocells are used for control:
124
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.
1. Fold the lever down completely.
On the rear of the mirror.
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-
tion.
Overview
3. Fold the lever back up.
Steering wheel heating
Overview
Functional requirements
▷
Keep the photocells clean.
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Button for steering wheel heating
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Turning on/off
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
heating turns on automatically if the function
was turned on at the completion of the last trip.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary only.
Memory function
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.
Exterior mirror position.
Height of the Head-up display.
125
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile.
Storing
1. Set the desired position.
2.
Press the button. The LED in the
button illuminates.
The following settings are not stored:
▷
▷
Backrest width.
Lumbar support.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.
Safety information
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
Warning
The stored position is called up.
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-
tion when the vehicle is stationary.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but-
tons is pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
Warning
Seat heating
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
Overview
Front
Overview
Seat heating
The memory buttons are located on the front
door.
126
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Back
Active seat ventilation
Principle
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
provide a comfortable seat temperature.
Overview
Seat heating
Turning on
Press the button once for each tem-
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are illuminated.
Active seat ventilation
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Additional information:
Switching on active seat ventilation
ECO PRO, refer to page 314.
Press the button once for each venti-
lation level.
Turning off
The highest level is active when three LEDs
are illuminated.
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs turn off.
The ventilation switches back by one level af-
ter a short time.
Seat heating distribution
The heating effect in the seat surface and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Switching off active seat ventilation
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs turn off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select desired seat.
Air conditioning rules
Principle
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the
seat heating distribution.
Depending on the equipment, some heating
and air conditioning functions can be automat-
ically activated depending on the outside tem-
perature.
127
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
General information
The outside temperature at which the func-
tions are to be automatically activated can be
set via iDrive.
Activation is performed if the outside temper-
ature exceeds or falls below the set tempera-
ture in the first few minutes after drive-ready
state has been switched on. A new adjustment
is carried out after the settings have been
changed.
Depending on the equipment package, the
following functions can be automatically acti-
vated:
▷
▷
▷
Seat heating.
Steering wheel heating.
Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after a stop, the functions are activated
automatically with the levels that were last se-
lected.
Functional requirement
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired function.
6. Activate the desired rule.
7. Set the level.
128
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,
especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
people, especially children, or animals unat-
tended in the vehicle.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Children in the rear seat
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
tems designed for the age, weight and size
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
129
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Installing child restraint
systems
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 183.
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
130
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
On the front passenger seat
Child seat security
Deactivating the airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Locking the seat belt
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.
Additional information:
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt.
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 183.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in
and pull it tight against the child restraint
system. The seat belt is disabled.
Seat position and height
After installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest
position. This seat position and height ensure
the best possible position for the belt and of-
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-
dent.
Unlocking the seat belt
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in
completely.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-
fully forward until the best possible seat belt
guide position is reached.
LATCH child restraint
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Pay attention to the specifications, operating
tips and safety instructions from the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using LATCH child restraint sys-
tems.
131
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Position
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
Icon
Meaning
General information
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Seats equipped with lower an-
chors are marked with a pair
(2) of LATCH icons.
Safety information
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Warning
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi-
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle seat belt in-
stead for the middle seat.
If the lower anchors on child restraint system
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint
system will not be able to provide suitable
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are
correctly engaged and that the child restraint
system fits securely against the backrest.
Warning
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower anchors or attachment points.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo-
cated behind the marked covers.
The covers fold back automatically when the
anchors of a child restraint system are in-
serted.
132
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
Before installing the LATCH child
restraint systems
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Warning
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower anchors or attachment points.
Installation of the LATCH child
restraint systems
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop-
erly engaged.
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
Attachment points
General information
Icon
Meaning
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Safety information
Warning
Routing the retaining strap
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided
to the upper attachment point without twist-
ing and not over sharp edges.
Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
1
Driving direction
2
3
4
Head restraint
Hook for upper retaining strap
Attachment point
133
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
After locking, make sure that the door cannot
be opened from the inside.
5
6
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Safety switch for the rear
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
Press the button on the driver's door.
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
This disables various functions so that they
cannot be operated from the rear.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
or along both sides of the supports for the
head restraint to the attachment point.
Additional information:
Safety switch, refer to page 112.
For the middle seat, guide it over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the at-
tachment point where applicable.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
134
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and options Auto Start/Stop function
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
the series. It also describes features and func-
The system switches off the engine during a
tions that are not necessarily available in the
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
country versions. This also applies to safety
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
functions and systems. When using these
Additional information:
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Coasting, refer to page 317.
General information
Start/Stop button
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
The function is activated from speeds of ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Principle
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off.
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
system is automatically activated or deacti-
vated.
Steptronic transmission: the
drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake pedal while
pressing the Start/Stop button.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby
state is switched back on.
Steptronic transmission
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Additional information:
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
Standby state, refer to page 40.
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
Driving off
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Apply gear position.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Driving off.
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
er's door is closed.
135
Driving
CONTROLS
Total time with switched-off engine
Steptronic transmission: manual
engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
ECO PRO driving mode: de-
pending on the vehicle equip-
ment, the total time that the
engine has been switched off
using the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is displayed on an auto-
matic engine stop.
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
▷
Engage selector lever position P.
The total time can be reset via the trip data.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Additional information:
ECO PRO, refer to page 314.
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.
Brake not engaged strongly enough.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The outside temperature is high and auto-
matic climate control is running.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
▷
▷
The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
Where there is a risk of window condensa-
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷
Engine or other parts not at operating tem-
perature.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
At higher elevations.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en-
gine stop have not been met.
Hood is unlocked.
Hill Descent Control is activated.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
vated.
▷
▷
Stop-and-go traffic.
Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi-
tion in N or R.
▷
▷
After driving in reverse.
Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
136
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
When changing from selector lever position
P to N, D, or R.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
When starting an oil level measurement.
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
additional functions Auto Start/Stop
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the vehicle features a variety of
sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information
to adapt to various traffic situations in an antic-
ipatory manner.
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
For instance, this applies to the following sit-
uations:
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷
A situation is detected in which the stop-
ping time is expected to be very short. The
engine is not automatically switched off. A
message appears on the control display,
depending on the situation.
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷
Hood was unlocked.
▷
A situation is detected in which the vehi-
cle should be started up immediately. The
switched-off engine starts automatically.
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
The function may be restricted if the naviga-
tion data is invalid, outdated or not available,
for example.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
▷
▷
▷
In case of excessive warming of the interior
when air conditioning is turned on.
Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off.
In case of excessive cooling of the interior
when the heating is turned on.
The engine is started during an automatic en-
gine stop.
In case of a risk of window condensa-
tion when the automatic climate control is
turned on.
▷
▷
Without mild hybrid technology: in case of a
steering operation.
When changing from selector lever position
D to N or R.
137
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Standby state is switched on.
Without Mild-Hybrid technology: via
button
Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Press the button.
Malfunction
Steptronic transmission: via selector
lever position
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-
vated in selector lever position M/S.
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Via the Driving Experience Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving
Experience Control.
Driving Experience Control
Principle
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
display
The Driving Experience Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
▷
LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
General information
The following systems are affected, for in-
stance:
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Characteristics of the drivetrain
Steptronic transmission.
Adaptive suspension.
Adaptive M chassis.
Steering.
General information
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
Display in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control.
138
Driving
CONTROLS
Turning on
Overview
Press the button repeatedly until
COMFORT is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
SPORT
Principle
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting
for more agility with an optimized suspension.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Turning on
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Driving modes
Principle
In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi-
vidual settings can be adjusted to support driv-
ing dynamics properties.
Button
Driving
mode
Configuration
SPORT
INDIVIDUAL
Configuration
SPORT
PLUS
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
COMFORT
ECO PRO
3. "Driving mode"
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
INDIVIDUAL
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati-
cally.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
SPORT PLUS
Principle
Principle
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted
drive.
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-
mized driving.
139
Driving
CONTROLS
Turning on
INDIVIDUAL configuration
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
General information
The individual configuration set last is acti-
vated directly when the driving mode is called
up again.
ECO PRO
Activating configuration of the driving
mode
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
Principle
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-
timized.
Turning on
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Parking brake
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Principle
Safety information
In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode,
individual settings can be adjusted to support
an economical driving style.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
The engine control and comfort features, for
instance the climate control output, are ad-
justed.
Configuration
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
140
Driving
CONTROLS
While driving
Warning
General information
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Use while driving serves as an emergency
braking function.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Pull the switch briefly to activate the
emergency stop function.
Overview
Additional information:
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 205.
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2.
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is depressed or se-
lector lever position P is set.
Parking brake
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Setting the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive off.
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED illuminates.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red. The parking
brake is set.
141
Driving
CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission: Automatic
Hold
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-
cally setting and releasing the brake such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-
cle from rolling back when driving off.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically engaged:
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
The driver's door is opened while the vehi-
cle is stationary.
▷
The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
still using the parking brake.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold
engages the parking brake and prevents the
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is
a risk of property damage. Deactivate Auto-
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Overview
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Automatic Hold
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
142
Driving
CONTROLS
The LED goes out.
Establishing operational readiness of
Automatic Hold
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
The indicator light goes out.
2.
Press the button.
The LED illuminates.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press on the brake pedal when switching
off.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Automatic Hold is ready to use.
After every vehicle restart, the last se-
lected setting is active.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault,
secure the vehicle against rolling away before
exiting.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Operational readiness is established and the
driver's door is closed.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle.
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is
kept from rolling away as soon as the
indicator light illuminates green.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake functionality after
a power interruption:
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
1. Turn on standby state.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or while selector lever po-
sition P is set and then push.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-
ess are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi-
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if
the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Switching operational readiness off
Press the button.
143
Driving
CONTROLS
Flashing
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlights illuminate when
the low-beam headlights are switched on.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,
arrow 2.
One-touch signaling
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-
justed.
Window wiper system
Safety information
Warning
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "One-touch turn signal"
5. Select the desired setting.
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
Brief flashing
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High-beam headlights,
headlight flasher
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the
window is dry.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
144
Driving
CONTROLS
Press the lever down.
NOTICE
▷
Turn off: press the lever down until it
reaches the 0 position.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Rain sensor
Turning on window wiper system
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
NOTICE
▷
▷
▷
▷
Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
Rain sensor, position 1.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When the journey is interrupted with the win-
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
continues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
Activating rain sensor
Turning off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
Press the lever up once from its 0 position,
arrow 1.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
145
Driving
CONTROLS
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
Cleaning the windshield
Deactivating rain sensor
Press the lever back into the 0 position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield,
and the wipers are turned on briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated while standby state is switched
on.
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
Windshield washer system
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only use the window washer
system when the washer fluid will not freeze.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
use the washer system when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
146
Driving
CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Principle
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
Folding out the wipers
1. Turn on standby state.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,
e.g., by applying the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.
Selector lever positions
Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automat-
ically.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
drive, for instance in car washes, in selector
lever position N.
Parking position P
Folding in the wipers
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the indi-
vidual wheels in selector lever position P.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their rest position and are
ready again for operation.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
147
Driving
CONTROLS
P is engaged automatically
▷
▷
Unintentional shifting into selector lever po-
sition R.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi-
tion.
▷
After the drive-ready state is switched off
and selector lever position R, D or M/S is
engaged.
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
▷
▷
After the standby state has been turned off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
2. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened while the vehicle
is stationary and selector lever position D,
M/S, or R is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the
vehicle may begin to move. Also set parking
brake.
Additional information:
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc-
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Parking brake, refer to page 140.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and
gear position D without pressing the brake.
Functional requirements
Engaging selector lever position P
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
A selector lever lock prevents the following in-
correct operation:
Press button P.
148
Driving
CONTROLS
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to
roll without its own drive for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Engaging selector lever position N
Principle
NOTICE
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han-
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not switch off standby
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car
wash.
Activating the Sport program
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 142.
4. If necessary, loosen the belt.
5. If necessary, open the door.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
6. Depress the brake pedal.
7. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
8. Switch off drive-ready state.
The sport program of the transmission is acti-
vated.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis-
played.
Ending the Sport program
Press the selector lever to the right.
The vehicle can roll.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
If the system is not operational, you may not
be able to change the selector lever position.
Manual mode M/S
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Principle
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 151.
149
Driving
CONTROLS
Activating manual mode
Ending the manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left from se-
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
Press the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to change gears quickly while keeping
both hands on the steering wheel.
General information
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Shifting
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
road speeds.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode tempora-
rily.
Shifting
▷
To downshift: press the selector lever for-
ward.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
▷
Upshifting: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
The transmission continues shifting automati-
cally in certain situations, for instance when
RPM limits are reached.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷
Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
mode
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Depending on the motorization: if driving mode
SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans-
mission does not automatically upshift in
M/S manual mode once the maximum speed
is reached.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma-
nently.
With the transmission version it is possible to
switch into automatic mode:
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick-
down.
▷
Keep the right shift paddle pulled until S is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
SPORT, refer to page 139.
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
150
Driving
CONTROLS
Steptronic Sport transmission
In vehicles with Mild-Hybrid technology and
corresponding vehicle battery, the action steps
for unlocking the transmission vary.
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul-
taneously activating kickdown and operating
the left shift paddles. This is not possible in
short-term manual mode.
Additional information:
Vehicle battery, refer to page 366.
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
engage selector lever position N
Shifting
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank
the engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button. The
starter must audibly start.
3. With your free hand, press the button on
the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the
selector lever into selector lever position N
and hold, arrow N, until selector lever posi-
tion N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:
keep the left shift paddle pulled.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
General information
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.
Additional information:
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 375.
With Mild-Hybrid technology: engage
selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing away.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button.
151
Driving
CONTROLS
3. With your free hand, press the button on
the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the
selector lever into selector lever position N
and hold, arrow N, until selector lever posi-
tion N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Functional requirement
Launch Control is available when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Starting with launch control
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
illuminates.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-
tle position, kickdown.
5. Release the brake.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 375.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
Launch Control
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after
the destination flag illuminates.
Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-
celerator pedal is not released.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, when used again.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving
off with Launch Control.
Additional information:
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
Break-in, refer to page 308.
152
Driving
CONTROLS
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
153
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features:Overview
Instrument cluster
Principle
1
Fuel gauge 165
Range 167
The instrument cluster consists of various digi-
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperatures as well as indicator and warning
lights.
2
3
Speedometer
Central display range 155
Navigation display
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may
be possible to deactivate the display change in
the instrument cluster via iDrive.
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-
tion Camera
Tachometer 166
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
Selection lists 169
Widgets 156
Trip odometer, see Trip data 170
ECO PRO displays 314
Power gauge 166
Safety information
Status Driving Experience Control 138
Transmission display 147
Engine temperature 167
Outside temperature 167
Check Control 157
Warning
If the driving information displays on the in-
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.
Turning drive-ready state off and on again
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be
6
7
8
9
Speed Limit Assistant 233
Speed Limit Info 218
154
Displays
CONTROLS
4. "Instrument panel"
Time 63
5. Select the desired setting.
Central display range
Depending on the equipment and configura-
tion, the following is displayed in the central
display range of the instrument cluster:
Assisted Driving View
Principle
▷
Navigation displays such as the map view
or, if destination guidance is active, a route
preview with route guidance information.
Depending on vehicle equipment, information
on driver assistance systems is displayed us-
ing an animation of the vehicle when driver
assistance is enabled.
▷
▷
Displays for service notifications.
Assisted Driving View. Information about
the assist systems is displayed in an ani-
mated surrounding area of the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving
View can be displayed permanently or tempo-
rarily with active Driver Assistance in the in-
strument cluster.
Some displays in the central display range can
be configured individually.
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment and national-market version.
Safety information
Driving mode view
Warning
Principle
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on the equipment, if the driving
mode view is activated, the displays in the in-
strument cluster will adapt to the respective
driving mode when a program is changed via
the Driving Experience Control.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Driving mode view"
Settings
Settings
Permanent display
1. "CAR"
Specific displays can be configured individu-
ally.
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Displays"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Central display area"
6. "Assisted Driving View"
155
Displays
CONTROLS
Temporary display
1. "CAR"
Instrument cluster with
extended features: widgets
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Principle
4. "Instrument panel"
Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver
Assistance is active"
The following displays can be selected:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.
Torque and power.
G-Meter.
Display
Trip data.
Efficiency display.
Selecting
An example: the indicator and warning lights
for the Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function and the Lane Change Assistant indi-
cate a lane change to the next lane. At the
same time, the lane change to the next lane is
shown with animation in the Assisted Driving
View.
Continue to press the button on the turn signal
lever until the desired widget is selected.
System limits
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system may indicate something wrong.
Display
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
156
Displays
CONTROLS
partially charged and fuel consumption can be
reduced.
G-Meter
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving.
ECO PRO bonus range
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded ex-
tension of the range as a result of fuel-efficient
driving is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range.
Efficiency display
Principle
Information about driving style and consump-
tion can be displayed in the form of a con-
sumption display as a widget in the instrument
cluster, for example.
Check Control
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
monitored systems.
General information
Depending on the activated driving mode, dif-
ferent information will be displayed:
General information
Driving
mode
Display
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
applicable, in the Head-up display.
COMFORT
SPORT
Average consumption.
Current consumption.
Energy recovery.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
a text message may appear on the control dis-
play.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO bonus range.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode.
Hiding Check Control messages
Current consumption.
Average consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel
consumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption display allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
to drive economically and in an environmen-
tally-friendly manner.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display
Energy recovery
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of
the vehicle is converted into electric energy in
coasting/overrun mode. The vehicle battery is
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the fault
is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,
the messages are displayed consecutively.
157
Displays
CONTROLS
The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Indicator/warning lights
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "CAR"
Principle
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus-
ter display the status of some functions in the
vehicle and indicate when a fault is present in
the monitored systems.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control messages"
4. Select the desired text message.
General information
The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Display
Check Control
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.
Red lights
Text messages
Text messages in combination with an icon
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-
trol message and the meaning of the indica-
tor/warning lights.
Seat belt reminder
Indicator light illuminates in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
Seat belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information such as the cause of a
fault or the required action can be called up via
Check Control.
▷
▷
The seat belt reminder can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the control display.
The seat belt is not buckled on the corre-
sponding rear seat.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned
correctly.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control messages"
158
Displays
CONTROLS
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 205.
Rear seat belt reminder: seat detection
The seat belt is not buckled on the cor-
responding rear seat.
Risk of collision
Warning light illuminates or flashes in
conjunction with an acoustic signal if
there is risk of imminent collision.
Airbag system
Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-
cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
Additional information:
▷
Intersection Collision Warning with city
braking function, refer to page 191.
when drive-ready state is switched on.
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-
fer to page 194.
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates
continuously: the airbag system or the seat
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Forward Collision Warning with
braking function
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 181.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-
neuver.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Additional information:
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
page 141.
Forward Collision Warning with braking func-
tion, refer to page 186.
Brake system
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the right
The brake pads are worn or there is
another issue with the brake system.
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with a vehicle crossing from the
right detected. Increased awareness is
required.
The braking assistance may not be op-
erational. A higher pedal force may be
required for braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
If equipped with Equipment Stop
Assistant
Additional information:
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking
function, refer to page 191.
Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered.
Additional information:
159
Displays
CONTROLS
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the left
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
hands not on steering wheel
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with a vehicle crossing from the
left detected. Increased awareness is
required.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds:
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. System interruption is imminent.
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if
applicable.
Additional information:
It is possible that the system will not execute
any supporting steering movements.
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking
function, refer to page 191.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
Additional information:
Daytime Pedestrian Collision
Mitigation
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
The warning light illuminates and a sig-
nal sounds: risk of imminent collision
with a person, e.g., a pedestrian or a
cyclist detected. Immediately initiate braking or
an evasive maneuver.
Drive power
Reduced drive power due to an over-
heated drivetrain.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 166.
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer
to page 194.
Yellow lights
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
Antilock Braking System
The system may not be operational.
The Antilock Braking System is not
available.
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-
sary.
The ability to steer may be restricted
during full braking.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
refer to page 225.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Steering Assistant
Additional information:
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 212.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: The warning
light flashes or illuminates.
A signal sounds: the system is switched off.
Additional information:
160
Displays
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Steering Assistant
▷
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 213.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal may sound: A system interrup-
tion is imminent.
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
page 214.
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has
been crossed.
Flat tire monitor
Additional information:
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
hands not on steering wheel
Additional information:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 345.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
Tire pressure monitor
Additional information:
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Follow the information in the Check
Control message.
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
be detected.
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the drive and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-
ing style to the road conditions.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the interference, the system auto-
matically becomes active again.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has failed or is being initialized. Driving
stability is restricted or has failed.
In the case of tires with special appro-
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop as needed.
Additional information:
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 213.
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The Dynamic Stability Control
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction
Control activated
Additional information:
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 338.
The Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-
vated or the Dynamic Traction Control
is activated.
161
Displays
CONTROLS
Steering system
Turn signal
Steering system may not be opera-
tional.
Turn signal is on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Turn signal, refer to page 143.
Exhaust emissions
▷
The warning light illuminates:
Parking lights
Worsening exhaust emissions, e.g.,
due to an incorrectly fitted fuel cap.
Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Parking lights are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights/low-beam headlights,
refer to page 175.
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
Low-beam headlights
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Low-beam headlights are switched on.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Additional information:
Parking lights/low-beam headlights,
refer to page 175.
Lane departure warning
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on. A lane boundary has been
detected on at least one side of the vehicle and
the system is ready to intervene. Warnings will
be issued. The system can perform steering
interventions.
Additional information:
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
page 364.
Green lights
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-
ing a steering intervention.
Rear seats: seat belt fastened
Additional information:
The seat belt is buckled on the corre-
sponding rear seat.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Rear seats: seat detection
Automatic High Beam Assistant is
switched on.
The seat belt is buckled on the corre-
sponding rear seat.
162
Displays
CONTROLS
High-beam headlights are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic situa-
tion.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function switched on
The system is turned on.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 177.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function, refer to page 225.
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function: vehicle ahead
Steptronic transmission: Automatic
Hold is activated. The vehicle is auto-
matically held in place when it is sta-
tionary.
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been
detected ahead of you.
Additional information:
Indicator light is flashing: vehicle ahead is driv-
ing off.
Driving, refer to page 135.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured
against rolling away
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
refer to page 225.
Steptronic transmission: The vehicle is
prevented from rolling away after the
brake is applied.
Speed Limit Assistant activated
Depending on the equipment, the indi-
cator light is illuminated together with
the icon for a speed control system:
Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected
speed limits can be accepted manually for the
displayed system.
Additional information:
Driving, refer to page 135.
Manual Speed Limiter
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 233.
The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
Speed Limit Assistant: apply speed
limit
Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 220.
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a
green checkmark is displayed.
Depending on the equipment: Cruise
Control
The system is active.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 233.
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-
trol, refer to page 218.
163
Displays
CONTROLS
Steering Assistant
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
A different icon may appear, depending
on vehicle equipment.
Additional information:
The system is active.
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 240.
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in
progress
Blue lights
Arrow icon for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
High-beam headlights
Additional information:
High-beam headlights have been
switched on.
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 241.
Additional information:
High-beam headlights, refer to page 144.
Lane Change Assistant: lane change
not possible
Drive power
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur-
rently possible.
Reduced drive power due to a cold
drivetrain.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 166.
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 241.
Gray lights
Lane Change Assistant: functional
requirements not met
Manual Speed Limiter
Depending on the national-market ver-
sion:
The system is interrupted.
Additional information:
Arrow icon for lane change gray: lane
change not possible; functional requirements
not met.
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to
page 220.
Additional information:
Depending on the equipment: Cruise
Control
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 241.
The system is interrupted.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is active.
Additional information:
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-
trol, refer to page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
164
Displays
CONTROLS
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is ready.
Additional information:
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is interrupted.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes
until you actively resume control by pressing
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Fuel gauge
Additional information:
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
refer to page 225.
Steering Assistant
General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Additional information:
Refueling, refer to page 320.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
An arrow next to the fuel pump
icon indicates the vehicle side
on which the fuel filler flap is lo-
cated.
The system is interrupted and will acti-
vate automatically as soon as all func-
tional requirements are met.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 240.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
White lights
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
No Distance Control displayed since
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
refer to page 225.
165
Displays
CONTROLS
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
Tachometer
2. "Settings"
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
the engine.
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Power meter"
Depending on the equipment, the tachometer
can also be shown in the Head-up display.
When the setting for the driving mode view is
activated, the activated power gauge is only
shown in the COMFORT driving mode.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features:Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
Display
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Tachometer"
When the setting for the driving mode view
is activated, the activated tachometer is only
shown in the COMFORT or SPORT driving
mode.
Needle in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when deceler-
ating, CHARGE.
To display the tachometer in the Head-up dis-
play, the sport displays of the Head-up display
must be activated.
Needle in the range of arrow 2: the drive power
in percent, POWER.
Reduced rotational speed range
The available rotational speed range may be
reduced due certain factors such as a cold
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-
matically adjusted depending on the available
rotational speed range.
Drive power
The available drive power may be reduced due
to certain factors, for instance a cold engine.
Depending on the available drive power, the
range for POWER is adjusted automatically.
If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a
reduction of the drive power.
Instrument cluster with
extended features:Power
gauge
Principle
The power gauge indicates the available drive
power as a percentage.
166
Displays
CONTROLS
dle or in the lower half of the
temperature display.
Example
icon
Description
▷
Hot engine: the needle is at the high tem-
perature value. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Reduced drive power due to a
cold drivetrain.
Reduced drive power due to an
overheated drivetrain.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
Additional information:
Coolant level, refer to page 361.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
A red indicator light is displayed.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Drive-ready state
is turned off and standby state
turned on.
Outside temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower,
a signal sounds.
READY is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
automatic engine start.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
Additional information:
Safety information
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 39.
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Modify your driving style to the weather
conditions at low temperatures.
Engine temperature
Display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
▷
Cold engine: the needle is at
the low temperature value.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
Range
▷
Normal operating tempera-
ture: the needle is in the mid-
Principle
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current full tank of fuel.
167
Displays
CONTROLS
until the next service is displayed briefly in the
instrument cluster.
General information
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
A service advisor can read out the mainte-
nance work from the vehicle key.
Some information on service notifications can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining
range means that engine functions cannot al-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when
cornering at speed.
Display
Detailed information on the service
notifications
More information may be displayed on the
control display.
The Check Control message appears
continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
NOTICE
3.
"Required services"
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel
promptly.
Maintenance work as well as possible le-
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa-
tion.
Icons
Display
Icons
Description
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
No service is currently required.
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
The time for recommended main-
tenance or a legally mandated in-
spection is approaching.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
Service interval is exceeded.
Service notifications
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in-
spections.
Principle
The service notifications indicate recom-
mended maintenance work.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
General information
After turning on the drive-ready state, the next
service appointment or the distance remaining
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
168
Displays
CONTROLS
3.
"Required services"
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.
Current audio source.
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
List of most recent telephone calls.
6. Select the desired setting.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
Gear shift indicator
Display
Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ing style.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the gear shift indicator is active
in manual mode M of the Steptronic transmis-
sion.
Depending on the equipment version, the list
in the instrument cluster may differ from the
illustration.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Suggestions to upshift or downshift are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Displaying and using the list
The lists can be displayed and operated using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Button
Function
Change the entertainment
source.
Example
Description
Efficient gear is set.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed
list.
Shift into efficient gear.
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls.
Turn the knurled wheel to se-
lect the desired setting.
Selection lists
Press the knurled wheel to
confirm the setting.
Principle
The list of the current en-
tertainment source can be
displayed in the instrument
cluster again by turning the
knurled wheel.
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
169
Displays
CONTROLS
The following information is displayed:
Trip data
▷
▷
▷
Total kilometers.
Configured interval for displaying trip data.
Principle
Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval.
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., trip distance.
▷
Average speed.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument
cluster.
Additional information:
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on various intervals such as after refu-
eling.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
Widgets, refer to page 156.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:
Display on the control display
Adjusting the display of the trip data
The intervals for the display of the trip data
in the instrument cluster and on the control
display are adjustable.
Overview
The following information is displayed depend-
ing on the set interval and driving mode:
1. "CAR"
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
Average consumption depending on the
configured interval.
▷
▷
Average speed.
4. "Values since"
5. Select the desired setting:
Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function.
▷
▷
▷
"Start of trip ( )": the values are auto-
matically reset approx. four hours after
the vehicle has come to a standstill.
▷
▷
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
Consumption history in form of a chart.
"Refueling ( )": the values are automati-
cally reset after refueling with a larger
quantity of fuel.
Displays
1. "CAR"
"Factory": average consumption since
delivery from the factory.
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
The values since the time of the factory
delivery are displayed.
Consumption history
The average consumption is shown in the con-
sumption history in form of a chart based on
the distance traveled and the driving mode.
▷
"Individual ( )": the values since the last
manual reset are displayed. The values
can be reset at any time.
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: "Individual ( )".
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment, information
about the distance covered can be displayed
as widget in the instrument cluster.
170
Displays
CONTROLS
With the button on the turn signal lever:
▷
▷
Torque.
Power.
1. Continue to press the button on the turn
signal lever until the widget for the trip data
is selected.
Displays
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Sport displays"
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features:Display in the instrument
cluster
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
widgets in the instrument cluster.
2. Press and hold the button on the turn sig-
nal lever.
The following widgets can be selected:
▷
▷
Widget for torque and power.
Widget for G-Meter.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Additional information:
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
Widgets, refer to page 156.
4. "Values since"
5. "Reset individual"
Vehicle status
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally set: "Individual ( )".
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Going to the vehicle status
1. "CAR"
Sport displays
2. "Vehicle status"
Principle
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Information at a glance
Icons
Description
Display on the control display
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of
the flat tire monitor, refer to
page 345.
Overview
The following information is displayed:
▷
▷
▷
Boost pressure.
Engine oil temperature.
G-Meter.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 338.
171
Displays
CONTROLS
3. "Displays"
Icons
Description
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
"Engine oil level": electronic
oil measurement, refer to
page 358.
Display
"Check Control messages":
displaying stored Check Con-
trol messages, refer to
page 157.
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
"Required services": display of
the service notifications, refer
to page 168.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.
Navigation instructions.
Check Control messages.
Selection list in the instrument cluster.
Driver assistance systems.
Sport displays.
BMW Head-up display
Principle
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance
the speed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
display
1. "CAR"
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
Overview
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The base setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Brightness"
The protective glass of the Head-up display is
located in the position marked.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-
ness is set.
Turning on/off
1. "CAR"
7. Press the Controller.
2. "Settings"
172
Displays
CONTROLS
When the low-beam headlights are switched
on, the brightness of the Head-up display can
be adjusted using the instrument lighting.
▷
"Sport displays":
▷
"Off": the Sport displays are not dis-
played in the Head-up display.
▷
"In SPORT mode": the Sport dis-
plays are only displayed in SPORT
driving mode.
Adjusting the height
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷
"Always": the Sport displays are con-
tinuously displayed in the Head-up
display.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Height"
▷
"Reduced height": if not all of the infor-
mation is in the driver's field of view,
the information can be displayed in the
lower section of the Head-up display.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
The height of the Head-up display can be
stored using the memory function.
Setting the rotation
The Head-up display view can be rotated.
▷
▷
Seat position.
Objects on the protective glass of the
Head-up display.
1. "CAR"
▷
Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the
Head-up display.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Rotation"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Wet road.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
7. Press the Controller.
Additional settings
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting:
The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable the system to function.
▷
"Speed Limit Assistance": access the
settings for the speed assistant.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
▷
"Display infotainment lists in": set up if
the selection lists are displayed in the
instrument cluster or the Head-up dis-
play.
173
Lights
CONTROLS
Lights
Icon
Function
Vehicle features and options
Low-beam headlights.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Lights and lighting
Automatic headlight control
Switches in the vehicle
Principle
The low-beam headlights are switched on and
off automatically depending on the ambient
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight
or if there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
The light switch is located next to the steering
wheel.
Activating
Switch position:
Icon
Function
Lights off.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low-beam headlights are
switched on.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive lighting functions.
174
Lights
CONTROLS
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
Parking lights, low-beam
headlights and roadside
parking lights
Welcome lights
General information
Principle
Switch position:
,
,
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Parking lights
Turning on
Switch position:
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
4. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
▷
▷
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are switched on for a
limited time.
Low-beam headlights
"Door handle lights"
Turning on
Switch position:
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
The low-beam headlights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
"Welcome Light Carpet"
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
The area next to the vehicle is illumi-
nated for a limited time.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
175
Lights
CONTROLS
▷
▷
,
Welcome Light Carpet
Depending on the national-market ver-
sion:
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Depending on the national-market version: af-
ter turning off the drive-ready state, the park-
ing lights will illuminate in position
.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
1. "CAR"
Pathway lighting
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
Principle
4. Depending on the national-market version:
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
lights, rear"
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
surrounding the vehicle.
Adaptive lighting functions
Switching pathway lighting on
After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly
push the turn signal lever forward.
Principle
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
lumination of the road.
Setting the duration
1. "CAR"
General information
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Pathway lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
6. "OK"
▷
▷
Adaptive Light Control.
Cornering light.
Activating
Switch position:
Daytime driving lights
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
Switch position:
176
Lights
CONTROLS
switches the high-beam headlights on or off
depending on the traffic situation.
Adaptive Light Control
General information
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and
other parameters, the laser high-beam head-
lights follow the course of the road.
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high-beam headlights are switched
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the
low speed range, the high-beam headlights
are not switched on by the system.
Cornering light
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
ies.
Principle
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional cornering
light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
The high-beam headlights can be switched on
and off manually at any time.
Activating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
General information
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
where applicable, the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering-wheel angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
Switch position:
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The adaptive headlight range control feature
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low-
beam headlights are switched on.
The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam
headlights.
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
tem switches on the high-beam head-
lights.
Principle
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
177
Lights
CONTROLS
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-
vated when manually switching the high-beam
headlights on and off.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Light is turned off.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
Increasing sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Deactivating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front again
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-
priate, dim the high beams manually.
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant can be adjusted.
The system may not be fully operational in
the following situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
Safety information
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
Warning
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. If
adjustments have been made and the sen-
sitivity has been modified, make sure that
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-
ually if required.
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
When the windshield in the area in front
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, etc.
178
Lights
CONTROLS
Setting the brightness
Laser high-beam headlights
Adjust the brightness with the
knurled wheel.
Principle
The headlight range of the high-beam head-
lights is increased and provides better illumi-
nation of the road.
General information
The laser high-beam headlights are integrated
into the headlights and emit from there.
Interior lighting
General information
When the high-beam headlights are switched-
on, starting with a speed of approx.
37 mph/60 km/h, the laser high-beam head-
lights in the headlight are automatically
switched on in addition to the LED high-beam
headlights.
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Overview
Depending on the national-market version, ad-
ditional information can be taken from the la-
ser sign on the headlight.
Buttons in the vehicle
Safety information
Interior lights
Reading lights
The sign is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
Turning interior lights on/off
Instrument lighting
Press the button.
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low-beam headlights
must be switched on to set the brightness.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle
can be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear headliner.
179
Lights
CONTROLS
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Brightness"
Turning reading lights on/off
Press the button.
5. Select the desired setting.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear.
Dynamic light
Individual actions, for example incoming calls
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.
1. "CAR"
Ambient light
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dynamic light"
5. Select the desired setting.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's
interior.
Dimmed while driving
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
Turning ambient light on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Selecting the color
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Color"
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
180
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
Airbags
1
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
Head airbag
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
2
3
Front airbags
Side airbag
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and
lap area.
The front airbag helps protect the driver and
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact
in which the seat belts alone would not provide
adequate protection.
181
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
shoulder rests against the backrest when
crossing the hands and the upper body
is as far back as possible while still main-
taining a comfortable grip on the steering
wheel.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a frontal impact.
There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
Protective effect
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
navigation devices or mobile phones.
General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as
intended and may cause additional injuries
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
airbag system.
Keep storage compartments near the air-
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or
center armrest.
▷
Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front seats that are not
specifically suited for seats with integrated
side airbags.
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as
jackets over the backrests.
Never modify either the individual compo-
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
Fasten the seat belts correctly.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low
as possible when the airbag is deployed.
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
182
Safety
CONTROLS
The ignition and inflation noise may lead
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Malfunction
▷
Warning light does not illuminate
when drive-ready state is turned on.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
▷
The warning light illuminates con-
tinuously.
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle
checked immediately by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
Setting the front seat positions
Safety information
The power that deploys the driver's/front
passenger airbags depends on the position of
the driver's/front passenger seat.
Warning
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Individual components can be hot after de-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 116.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Automatic deactivation of
the front passenger airbags
Principle
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
The front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
Display in the instrument cluster
General information
When drive-ready state is turned on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-
cating the operational readiness of the entire
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.
Before transporting a child on the front pass-
enger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
183
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety information
Indicator light for the front
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Make sure that the front
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-
well.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
▷
The indicator light illuminates
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
passenger's side are not ac-
tivated.
Fault of the automatic deactivation
system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
indicator light for the front passenger airbags
illuminates.
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-
son of sufficient size is detected on the
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side
are activated.
In this case, change the seat position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear seat.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates
that the child restraint system has been de-
tected and the front passenger airbags are not
activated.
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface:
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷
Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-
tem is to be installed on it.
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
Intelligent Safety
No moisture in or on the seat.
Principle
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance systems.
184
Safety
CONTROLS
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
Intelligent Safety consists of one or more sys-
tems that can help prevent the risk of imminent
collision.
Overview
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function, refer to page 186.
Button in the vehicle
▷
▷
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 189.
Intersection Collision Warning with city
braking function, refer to page 191.
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-
fer to page 194.
▷
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 199.
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 202.
Intelligent Safety
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
page 204.
Settings
Safety information
The following settings can be selected for In-
telligent Safety systems:
Warning
▷
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated
for the sub-functions, for instance setting
for warning time.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety sys-
tems are switched on according to the indi-
vidual settings.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Intelligent Safety
systems can be configured individually. The
individual settings are activated and stored.
As soon as a setting is changed on the
menu, all settings of the menu are acti-
vated.
Warning
▷
"ALL OFF": All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
185
Safety
CONTROLS
Display
Forward Collision Warning
with braking function
Button Status
Button illuminates green: all Intelli-
gent Safety systems are switched
on.
Principle
The Forward Collision Warning with braking
function is a warning function that notifies the
driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes
automatically as necessary. In the event of an
accident, the system helps by reducing impact
speed.
Button illuminates orange: some
Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off or currently unavailable.
Button does not illuminate: all Intel-
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Switching Intelligent Safety systems
on/off
The system issues a two-phase warning of
a possible risk of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The tim-
ing of warnings may vary with the current driv-
ing situation.
General information
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati-
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli-
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
Operation
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
Driver Attention Camera in the instrument clus-
ter captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi-
tionally, the system checks for visual impair-
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect
the timing of the warnings.
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Configure Intelligent
Safety systems individually if required.
Safety information
Press the button repeatedly. The fol-
lowing settings are switched between:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
▷
▷
"ALL ON"
"INDIVIDUAL"
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in-
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
"ALL OFF": The menu is selected. All
Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
186
Safety
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
▷
▷
▷
"Early"
"Medium"
"Late": only acute warnings are dis-
played.
Warning with brake function
Display
Sensors
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-
ment cluster and Head-up display as applica-
ble.
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
With radar sensor: front radar sensor.
Icon
Measure
Additional information:
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-
vance warning.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Brake and increase distance.
Switching Forward Collision
Warning on/off
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds: Acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Turning on the system automatically
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
Prewarning
This prewarning is provided, for instance when
there is impending risk of a collision or the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Turning the system on/off manually
Follow instructions for settings, dis-
play, and operation in the Intelligent
Safety chapter.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Additional information:
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 184.
Acute warning with brake function
An acute warning is displayed in case of the
imminent risk of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another object at a high differen-
tial speed.
187
Safety
CONTROLS
Actively intervene if an acute warning is given,
e.g., apply brakes. Depending on the driving
situation and the equipment version, the acute
warning may be accompanied by a brief acti-
vation of the braking system.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief
activation of the braking system is omitted.
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
If an acute warning is provided, the system
may also provide assistance such as through
automatic brake intervention when there is risk
of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prewarning.
Brake intervention
Detection range
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle
is used.
The system may also assist with brake inter-
vention if there is a risk of collision.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
The system's detection capability is limited.
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
the brake intervention occurs as a brief activa-
tion of the braking system. No automatic delay
occurs.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-
cient force or by actively moving the steering
wheel.
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
188
Safety
CONTROLS
temporarily. The system is enabled as soon as
the speed drops below this value again.
Safety information
Warning
System limits of the sensors
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
▷
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
Warning
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Also, do not use this system when towing.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn-
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re-
sponses.
Evasion Assistant
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Principle
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver per-
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear
suddenly.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
General information
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
The system issues a warning and intervenes
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-
neuver is possible. Sensors monitor and detect
the clearance around the vehicle. If the system
detects sufficient free space alongside the ve-
hicle, it helps the driver perform an evasive
maneuver safely.
Functional requirements
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is
on.
189
Safety
CONTROLS
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-
fer to page 194.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The
system is designed to provide assistance dur-
ing evasive maneuvers when there is a risk of
collision.
▷
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function is switched on.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prewarning.
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function, refer to page 186.
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
System limits
Safety information
Switching Evasion Assistant on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or person, e.g., a pedestrian, a warning
light is shown on the instrument cluster and
Head-up display.
Icon
Measure
Detection range
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-
vance warning.
Brake and increase distance.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for
obstacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Warning light flashes red and a sig-
nal sounds: acute warning for people,
e.g., pedestrians.
The system's detection capability is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
Acute warning with evasion support
The following situations may not be detected,
for example:
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, an acute warning is
displayed if there is an immediate risk of colli-
sion.
190
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can
be detected by the system as soon as these
vehicles enter into the detection range of the
system.
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-
fic is detected.
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
The system issues a two-phase warning of
a possible risk of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The
timing of warnings may vary with the current
driving situation.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Ad-
ditionally, the system checks for visual impair-
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect
the timing of the warnings.
▷
▷
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
Safety information
Also, do not use this system when towing.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Intersection Collision
Warning with city braking
function
Principle
The Intersection Collision Warning with city
braking function is a warning function that
helps prevent accidents with cross traffic at in-
tersections and junctions. In the event of an
accident, the system helps by reducing impact
speed.
Warning
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the system warns the driver of a possible
risk of collision and brakes automatically if nec-
essary.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
191
Safety
CONTROLS
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Warning with brake function
Display
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-
ment cluster and Head-up display as applica-
ble.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Icon
Meaning
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-
vance warning for risk of collision with
vehicle crossing from the right.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for
immediate risk of collision.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-
vance warning for risk of collision with
vehicle crossing from the left.
Switching Intersection Collision
Warning on/off
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for
immediate risk of collision.
Turning on the system automatically
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-
vance warning for risk of collision with
vehicle from an undetectable direc-
tion of travel.
Turning the system on/off manually
Follow instructions for settings, dis-
play, and operation in the Intelligent
Safety chapter.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for
immediate risk of collision.
Additional information:
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 184.
Prewarning
For example, a prewarning is displayed when
a risk of collision with a crossing vehicle is de-
tected.
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Intervene if a prewarning is issued, e.g., apply
brakes.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
Acute warning with brake function
An acute warning is displayed in the event of
an immediate risk of collision with a crossing
vehicle.
▷
▷
▷
"Early"
"Medium"
If an acute warning is issued, brake and evade
as necessary. If an acute warning is provided,
"Late": only acute warnings are dis-
played.
192
Safety
CONTROLS
the system may provide assistance such as
through automatic brake intervention when
there is risk of collision.
Detection range
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prewarning.
Brake intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
The system may also assist with brake inter-
vention if there is a risk of collision.
The system's detection capability is limited.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-
cient force or by actively moving the steering
wheel.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Note the limi-
tations of the detection range and functional
limitations.
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,
e.g. by buildings.
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷
▷
Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.
System limits
Vehicles with an unusual side view.
Safety information
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Warning
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
▷
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
Also, do not use this system when towing.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn-
193
Safety
CONTROLS
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re-
sponses.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Daytime Pedestrian
Collision Mitigation
Principle
The Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is
a warning function that notifies the driver of a
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and
cyclists and brakes automatically as neces-
sary. The system issues warnings for speeds
that are common in towns and cities. In the
event of an accident, the system helps by re-
ducing impact speed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
With radar sensor: front radar sensor.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
The system issues a warning of a possible
risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Detection range
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
The detection range in front of the vehicle is
divided into two areas:
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷
Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g.,
pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the
central area. A warning is issued about pedes-
trians who are located within the extended
194
Safety
CONTROLS
area only if they are moving in the direction of
the central area.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may
also assist with brake intervention.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Switching Pedestrian Warning
on/off
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-
cient force or by actively moving the steering
wheel.
Turning on the system automatically
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
System limits
Turning the system on/off manually
Safety information
Follow instructions for settings, dis-
play, and operation in the Intelligent
Safety chapter.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Additional information:
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 184.
Warning with brake function
Display
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is shown
on the instrument cluster and Head-up display
as applicable.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to pedestrians and cy-
clists when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Icon
Meaning
Warning light illuminates red and
acoustic signal sounds: Risk of immi-
nent collision detected.
Detection range
The system's detection capability is limited.
Alternatively, depending on the vehi-
cle equipment, a red warning triangle
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is-
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
Intervene immediately by braking or making an
evasive maneuver.
▷
▷
Partially hidden persons.
Persons that are not detected as such be-
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
Brake intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle
is used.
▷
▷
Persons outside of the detection range.
Persons having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
195
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Safety information
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Warning
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
road and traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate Do not jerk the steering
wheel in response to a warning.
Functional limitations
The system may be restricted or not available
in the following situations:
▷
If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
Also, do not use this system when towing.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Lane departure warning
Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
lane.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
Sensors
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
The system is controlled by cameras behind
the windshield.
Additional information:
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
fore exiting the lane.
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
for the lane departure warning to be active.
Depending on the equipment version, if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
boundary is crossed, the system may inter-
vene with a brief active steering intervention
in addition to vibrating. The system thus helps
keep the vehicle in the lane.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
196
Safety
CONTROLS
Turning the system on/off manually
Switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec-
tion and lane departure warning.
Follow instructions for settings, dis-
play, and operation in the Intelligent
Safety chapter.
Additional information:
1. "CAR"
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 184.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
Setting Lane Departure Warning
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
ter every driving off.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. Select the desired setting:
Display in the instrument cluster
Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
equipment and national-market version.
▷
▷
▷
"Early"
"Medium"
Icon
Meaning
"Reduced": some warnings are sup-
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance when purposely driving over
pathway lines in curves or with dynamic
passing without a turn signal.
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-
tem is switched on. A lane boundary
has been detected on at least one
side of the vehicle and the system
is ready to intervene. Warnings will
be issued. The system can perform
steering interventions.
▷
"Off": no warnings are issued.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
Indicator light flashes green: System
is performing a steering intervention.
2. "Settings"
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the
instrument cluster.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
Additional information:
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems.
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 155.
197
Safety
CONTROLS
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
vention, a continuous warning will sound.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sage are an encouragement to pay closer at-
tention to the lane.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
End of warning
For instance, the warning will be canceled in
the following situations:
Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: if, in the speed range up to
130 mph/210 km/h a lane boundary is crossed,
the system may intervene with a brief active
steering intervention in addition to vibrating.
The steering intervention supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane. The steer-
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering
wheel and can be manually overridden at any
time. During an active steering intervention,
the display in the instrument cluster will flash.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
When returning to your own lane.
With hard accelerating or braking.
With hazard warning system switched on.
When flashing.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations:
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.
When another driver assistance system is
activated, if applicable.
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.
When flashing.
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are not detected.
When the system limits are reached.
With hazard warning system switched on.
In driving situation with high driving dynam-
ics.
System limits
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Safety information
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
Warning
When actively merging back to your own
lane after passing.
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
Warning signal
Depending on the equipment version: in the
event of multiple active steering interventions
by the system within 3 minutes without the
driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
198
Safety
CONTROLS
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
General information
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
minimum speed.
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
dimly.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the
situations described above. The warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel vibrates.
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited.
Vehicles with Side Collision Warning: At
speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, this sys-
tem can intervene with brief, active steering
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.
The steering intervention occurs when a mini-
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed
is displayed on the control display in the menu
for the steering intervention.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
the driver at different levels.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
199
Safety
CONTROLS
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot
Detection
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
6. Select the desired setting.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems.
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.
For vehicles with steering intervention:
cameras behind the windshield.
Vehicles with steering intervention:
switching steering intervention on/off
Additional information:
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec-
tion and lane departure warning.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection
on/off
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Turning the system on/off manually
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
6. "Steering intervention"
Follow instructions for settings, dis-
play, and operation in the Intelligent
Safety chapter.
Additional information:
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 184.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the
instrument cluster.
200
Safety
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Warning light flashing
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 155.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing
purposes.
Warning function
System limits
Warning light in exterior mirror
Safety information
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Prewarning
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot
or approaching from the rear.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Acute warning
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
If the turn signal is activated while a vehicle
is in your hazard area, the steering wheel vi-
brates briefly and the warning light in the exte-
rior mirror flashes brightly.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or the turn signal has been
deactivated.
▷
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
For vehicles with steering intervention:
cameras, refer to page 35.
Vehicles with steering intervention
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
When there is no response to the vibration
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief
active steering intervention. The steering inter-
vention helps return the vehicle into the lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on
the steering wheel and can be manually over-
ridden at any time.
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
201
Safety
CONTROLS
For vehicles with steering intervention, this in-
tervention can be limited, for instance in the
following situations:
General information
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
collision. For this purpose, the system issues
a warning with a flashing LED in the exterior
mirror and a vibrating steering wheel. If neces-
sary, the system will carry out an active steer-
ing intervention.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
uations.
Safety information
Side collision mitigation
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Principle
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an
impending side collision.
202
Safety
CONTROLS
Setting the Side Collision Warning
Warning
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems.
Sensors
Displays in the instrument cluster
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the
instrument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 155.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Warning function
Functional requirement
The camera behind the windshield determines
the lane boundary positions.
Warning light in exterior mirror
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-
vention to be active.
Turning the side collision warning
on/off
Turning the system on/off manually
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Follow instructions for settings, dis-
play, and operation in the Intelligent
Safety chapter.
Additional information:
Acute warning
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 184.
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel starts vibrating.
203
Safety
CONTROLS
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
If necessary, an active steering intervention is
performed to prevent the collision and main-
tain the vehicle within its own lane.
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited.
The steering intervention can be noticed on
the steering wheel and can be manually over-
ridden at any time.
Rear-end collision
preparation
System limits
Safety information
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
hind.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
General information
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning
flashers will be switched on.
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
are triggered.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
204
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety information
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
This function may be restricted if the speed
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or
similar to your own speed.
If equipped with Equipment
Stop Assistant
Warning
Principle
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer-
gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
General information
The Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered
automatically. The system can only be trig-
gered manually by the occupants.
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane keeping.
Sensors
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the system includes a
lane change function.
The system is controlled by radar sensors on
the sides at the rear.
Additional information:
With lane change function: on motorways or
motorway-like roads, the system steers the ve-
hicle to the side of the road or shoulder where
possible. On other roads or with high traffic
volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in
the current lane.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Turning rear-end collision
preparation on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
The system is deactivated when reversing.
205
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
When steering.
Overview
When flashing.
When depressing the accelerator pedal.
When switching off the hazard warning sys-
tem.
▷
▷
When canceling the Emergency Request.
When switching the selector lever position
at a standstill.
▷
The parking brake switch is pressed.
Parking brake
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
tem will carry out the following settings:
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
The interior lights are switched on.
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant can be trig-
gered at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h
up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
The central locking system is unlocked.
▷
With lane change function: lane changes
are executed when the traffic situation al-
lows.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Status
Triggering the Emergency Stop
Assistant
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Briefly pull the parking brake switch to
trigger the Emergency Stop Assistant.
Without lane change function:
▷
▷
With lane change function: releasing the
switch may trigger an automatic lane
change.
Icon
Status
When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
lane.
The system will take control of the vehicle
for a maximum of 2 minutes.
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.
Lane keeping is briefly interrupted.
An emergency call is triggered when sta-
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.
Lane boundary driven over.
When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
lane.
Canceling Emergency Stop
Assistant
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is still ac-
tive.
For instance, the system will be canceled in the
following situations:
206
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.
Icon
Status
Time.
Warning light illuminates red and
acoustic signal sounds: Hands not
touching steering wheel. Interruption
of lane keeping is imminent.
Vehicle speed.
Global Positioning System coordinates.
Data protection
Warning light illuminates red and
acoustic signal sounds: Lane keeping
is switched off.
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
regulations of the country in which the system
is to be used. The user is responsible for the
use of the system and compliance with respec-
tive applicable regulations.
System limits
Use the system only in the event of a driver
failure.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws regarding use of the system should
be verified at regular intervals, especially when
frequently crossing borders.
The system cannot replace the driving per-
formance of a driver who is fit to drive.
BMW Drive Recorder
Principle
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
the vehicle.
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic.
Functional requirements
General information
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Privacy Policy was accepted.
Recording type was selected.
Recording time was selected.
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.
The function makes it possible to document
the accident with the correspondingly set
recording type.
▷
Manual storage of the recording.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
before the first use of the recording function.
The function makes it possible to document
traffic situations with the correspondingly
set recording type.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
1. "Apps"
The assistance systems' cameras are used to
record, e.g., Panorama View.
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. Accept Privacy Policy.
4. "Settings"
Additionally, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
207
Safety
CONTROLS
5. "Recording allowed"
If a camera change occurred during the record-
ing, different segments of the video can be se-
lected.
6. Select the desired setting.
Recording functions
Settings
Automatic recording
Recordings are saved automatically when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident.
Recording type
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Settings"
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
4. "RECORDING TYPE"
5. Select the desired setting.
Manual recording
Using the button
Recording time
1. "Apps"
Press and hold this button.
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Settings"
Via iDrive
4. Select the desired setting.
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Start recording"
To stop the recording: "Cancel".
Cameras
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Settings"
Recording can also be started by selecting the
widget on the control display.
4. "Camera selection"
5. Select desired camera.
Recording playback and
administration
Stored video recordings can be played back,
exported and deleted.
In case of an accident, the system switches
automatically to "All" cameras.
If driver assistance systems are enabled, their
camera views are automatically selected.
For your own safety, the video recording is
only displayed on the control display up to ap-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
versions, the video recording is only displayed
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
tor lever is in the P position.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not
be possible to store recordings if the damage
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply
was interrupted.
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may
not be possible to export recordings correctly.
3. "Saved recordings"
4. Select desired recording.
5. Select the desired setting.
The preferred file system for USB storage is
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.
208
Safety
CONTROLS
Function
Active Protection
When the seat belt is fastened, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt straps are au-
tomatically tightened once after driving away.
Principle
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
In accident-critical situations, the following in-
dividual functions become active as needed:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic pretensioning of the front seat
belts.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
various PreCrash functions.
Automatic closing of the windows. The win-
dows remain open with a small gap.
The panoramic glass sunroof closes auto-
matically. The sun protection is also closed.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci-
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
Depending on the equipment: automatic
positioning of the backrest for the front
passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci-
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again.
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.
Severe understeering.
Severe oversteering.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati-
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat
belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten
the seat belt before continuing to drive.
Certain functions of several systems can,
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-
tion triggering:
All other systems can be restored to the de-
sired setting.
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function: automatic brake intervention.
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function: brake booster.
PostCrash iBrake
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions.
Principle
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
standstill without intervention by the driver.
Safety information
Warning
General information
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a
further collision and its consequences.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, critical situations might not be
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
209
Safety
CONTROLS
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
automatic braking allows.
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-
ready state is switched on.
After starting the trip, the system is trained to
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-
gue can be detected.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher
than the brake pressure generated by the au-
tomatic brake function. Automatic braking is
interrupted.
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-
ing criteria into account:
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
Canceling automatic braking
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance when
making an evasive maneuver.
Driving conditions, for instance time, length
of trip.
Depending on the equipment: attention
of the driver through the Driver Attention
Camera.
Cancel automatic braking:
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly
longer.
The system is active starting at ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a
break recommendation.
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for
slightly longer.
Break recommendation
Fatigue alert
Setting break recommendation
The break recommendation can be switched
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Principle
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert-
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo-
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The
system recommends a break.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
5. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
Display
Warning
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the control display
with the recommendation to take a break.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
210
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
System functionality may be limited. If the
function is limited, either no warning may be
issued or an unwarranted warning may be is-
sued. The system function may be limited in
the following situations, e.g.:
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
In active driving situations such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.
In the event of strong side winds.
211
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
The brake assistant automatically applies
maximum braking assistance when the brake
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.
To make full use of braking assistance, do not
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during
full braking.
Drive-off assistant
Antilock Braking System
Principle
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
uphill grades.
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
of the wheels during the braking process.
Driving off
1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal.
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-
ing full braking, which increases active driving
safety.
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off
quickly.
General information
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each engine start.
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
Malfunction
In order to prevent rolling back when driving
off, use the parking brake.
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
A Check Control message is displayed.
1.
Pull and release switch before driving
off.
The parking brake is set.
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-
ble.
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to
drive off.
Steerability is limited during full braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
212
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Overview
Dynamic Stability Control
Button in the vehicle
Principle
The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep
the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
drive power and by brake intervention on indi-
vidual wheels.
General information
The Dynamic Stability Control will detect, e.g.,
the following unstable driving conditions:
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
DSC OFF
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Deactivating/activating the Dynamic
Stability Control
Safety information
General information
Warning
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-
ing stability is limited when accelerating and
cornering.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
Deactivating the system
Hold the button down until DSC OFF
is displayed in the instrument cluster
and the DSC OFF indicator light is illu-
minated.
Warning
Activating the system
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in
critical driving situations. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic
Stability Control.
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light turn off.
213
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Display
Overview
In the instrument cluster
Button in the vehicle
If the Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Indicator lights and warning lights
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the drive and
brake power.
DSC OFF
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has failed.
Activating/deactivating the Dynamic
Traction Control
Dynamic Traction Control
Activating the system
Press the button.
Principle
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of
the Driving Stability Control where the drive
power is optimized.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC
OFF illuminates.
The system ensures maximum drive power
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.
Deactivating the system
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light turn off.
General information
The vehicle has maximum traction when Dy-
namic Traction Control is on. Driving stability
is limited during acceleration and when corner-
ing.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
vated, TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-
trol may be useful in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Indicator light
When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Traction Control is activated.
When driving with snow chains.
214
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
▷
Pitch attitude with degree indication and
percentage.
Automatic program change
In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability
Control is activated automatically:
▷
▷
Transverse gradient with degree indication.
Graphic display for the steering-wheel an-
gle.
▷
▷
▷
The Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function is activated.
On a brake intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
Hill Descent Control
The vehicle has a flat tire.
Principle
BMW xDrive
Hill Descent Control is a downhill control fea-
ture that adjusts the vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients, e.g., when driving on un-
paved roads.
Principle
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of
the vehicle. BMW xDrive and other suspension
control systems, e.g., Dynamic Stability Con-
trol, work together to further optimize traction
and driving dynamics.
General information
When the system is active, the vehicle moves
at the speed set by the driver, without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the
speed, the system automatically distributes the
brake power to the individual wheels. This im-
proves driving stability and steerability. If nec-
essary, the Antilock Braking System prevents
the wheels from locking.
General information
BMW xDrive variably distributes driving forces
to the front and rear axles as required by the
driving situation and road conditions.
Because of the needs-based use of the all-
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a re-
duction in consumption.
The system can be activated below approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Speeds can be set between approx.
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
When the vehicle is driving downhill, the sys-
tem reduces the speed to the set value, within
the physical limits.
Display on the control display
Display xView display
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "xVIEW"
Hill Descent Control provides assistance when
driving in selector lever positions D, N, and R.
The following information is displayed:
▷
▷
▷
With a navigation system: compass display
for the driving direction.
With navigation system: elevation for the
current position.
With navigation system: destination flag in
compass direction to the destination.
215
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Overview
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Button in the vehicle
Using the cruise control rocker switch
The set speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
Hill Descent Control
Activate Hill Descent Control
▷
▷
Press the rocker switch up: the speed in-
creases gradually.
Press the button.
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h
and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as
the set speed.
Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
speed increases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
Active Park Distance Control: the Park Dis-
tance Control brake function is deactivated.
▷
▷
Press the rocker switch down: the speed
decreases gradually.
Additional information:
Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
speed decreases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
Active Park Distance Control, refer to page 246.
Display in the instrument cluster
Using the brake pedal
While the system is adjusting the speed, the
set speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal.
An icon and the selected set
speed are displayed.
▷
Indicator green: Hill Descent
Control is active. The system
is actively braking the vehi-
cle.
Deactivating Hill Descent Control
▷
Indicator gray: Hill Descent Control is on
standby.
Press the button again.
The system is automatically deactivated
above approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Display in the Head-up display
The status of the system can also be shown in
the Head-up display.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
216
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Variable sport steering
The variable sports steering facilitates direct
and agile handling with little steering effort.
The variable sports steering works independ-
ently of the current speed, varying the steering
gear ratio in line with the steering angle.
217
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
For information on the current map version
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-
igation system chapter.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Without a navigation system, the system is
subject to limitations imposed by technology.
Traffic signs with speed limitations are de-
tected and displayed only. Speed limits due to
entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are
not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic
signs are always displayed.
Additional information:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Speed Limit Info
Safety information
Speed Limit Info
Warning
Principle
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
Overview
Sensors
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the nav-
igation system and also displays speed limits
present on routes without signs.
The system is controlled by cameras behind
the windshield.
Additional information:
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-
rent map data for the country in which the ve-
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
218
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Displaying Speed Limit Info
Display
General information
Speed Limit Info
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the in-
strument cluster or via iDrive.
Icon
Description
Current speed limit.
Depending on the na-
tional-market version, it
is possible to switch
between the units of
measurement.
Activating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Speed limits"
7. "Show current limit"
Without a navigation
system the traffic sig-
nals are grayed out
after curves or longer
stretches of distance
traveled.
No data for the current
speed limit available.
The displays may vary
depending on vehicle
equipment.
Depending on the
equipment, Speed Limit
Info not available.
Warning signals
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded
or the speed limit changes. The display also
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.
Settings
Individual settings can be configured for Speed
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed
changes.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. Select the desired setting.
Manual Speed Limiter
Principle
The warning that is issued when a speed limit
is exceeded may depend on the Speed Limit
Assistant settings.
The system can be used to set a speed limit,
for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-
ceeding speed limits.
Additional information:
General information
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 233.
The system can limit the speed, starting at
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven
at any speed below the set speed limit.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Overview
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Functional limitations
The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
Button Function
System on/off.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
For traffic signs that are fully or partially
concealed by objects, stickers, or paint.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Rocker switch:
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
Changing the speed limit.
In areas not covered by the navigation sys-
tem.
Operation
When roads deviate from the navigation
such as due to changes in road layout.
Turning on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.
When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
The current speed is adopted as the speed
limit.
▷
▷
▷
When the traffic signs do not correspond to
the standard.
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
stationary or driving at low speeds, the speed
limit is set to 20 mph/30 km/h.
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected.
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle
may change to COMFORT drive mode.
220
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Turning off
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Exceeding the speed limit
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
limit, a warning is issued.
The system switches off automatically in the
following situations, for example:
▷
▷
▷
When the engine is switched off.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
When Cruise Control is switched on.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When certain programs are activated via
the Driving Experience Control.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
vated.
The displays turn off.
Interrupting
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Changing the speed limit
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is
greater than the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-
ally, a signal sounds.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set.
▷
When the speed limit is reduced to be-
low the current vehicle speed, the signal
sounds after some time.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷
When the speed limit is intentionally ex-
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Displays in the instrument cluster
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded such as when driving downhill,
the vehicle is not actively braked.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
The current speed can also be stored by
pressing a button:
221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive.
Safety information
▷
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
No marking: system is
switched off.
Indicator light
Icon
Description
The indicator light illuminates: the
system is switched on.
The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
Warning
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.
Cruise Control
With high traffic volume.
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
General information
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
222
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Interrupting Cruise Control
Button Function
Interrupting manually
Cruise control on/off.
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Interrupt cruise control.
▷
▷
▷
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi-
tion D is disengaged.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Switching cruise control on/off
Adjusting the speed
Turning on
Maintaining and storing the speed
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
Turning off
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
223
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Continuing cruise control
Press the button.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Changing the speed
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Press the button with the system in-
terrupted.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
The maximum speed that can be set de-
pends on the vehicle.
▷
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the accel-
erator pedal.
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
224
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
uation allows.
Indicator light
Icon
Description
No indicator light: system is switched
off.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
Indicator light green: system is active.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Displays in the Head-up display
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display.
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
Safety information
Warning
System limits
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Principle
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
matically.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
225
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Button Function
Without Steering Assistant:
Cruise control on/off.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Warning
With Steering Assistant:
Interrupt cruise control.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Without Steering Assistant:
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Without Steering Assistant:
Interrupt cruise control.
Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations:
Increase the distance.
Switch Distance Control on/off.
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
Reduce distance.
Switch Distance Control on/off.
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Overview
Additional information:
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Application range
The system is best used on well-maintained
roads.
With Steering Assistant:
Cruise control on/off.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
With Steering Assistant:
Select function.
226
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment.
Turning on
With Steering Assistant:
The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control
when towing.
2.
If necessary, set the cruise control.
Without Steering Assistant:
Turning on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
With Steering Assistant: Assisted
Driving Mode
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
General information
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
This button is used to switch the con-
figured function on and off.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The button can be used to set the pri-
marily used function.
Turning off
To switch off the system while stationary, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Setting the function
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired
function is selected in the toolbar. The
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
With Steering Assistant.
Without Steering Assistant.
Icon
Function
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Cruise Control with Distance Control.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel:
Depending on the equipment version,
Cruise Control with Distance Control
and Steering Assistant.
With Steering Assistant.
Without Steering Assistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
227
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.
Press the button.
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Changing the speed
When the vehicle is stationary, the seat
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is
opened.
▷
The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Adjusting the speed
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be
activated.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There
is a risk of accidents and risk of property
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
228
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to
the traffic and weather conditions and main-
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly
by braking.
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Reducing the distance
Press the button on the steering wheel with
the system interrupted:
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
With Steering Assistant.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
Without Steering Assistant.
Increasing the distance
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
Automatic adaptation of the distance
Changing between Cruise Control
with/without Distance Control
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: the system can be set so that
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-
tem analyzes the traffic situation and ambient
conditions, e.g., poor visibility.
Safety information
Warning
1. "CAR"
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"
Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Switching Cruise Control without Distance
Control off and on:
Continuing cruise control
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
▷
▷
Press and hold this button.
Press and hold this button.
229
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
With Steering Assistant: switch on Distance
Control:
Icon
Description
Distance 1
Press the button.
Without Steering Assistant: switch on Distance
Control:
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
▷
▷
Press the button.
Press the button.
After changing, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched
on.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
Detected vehicle
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
Icon
Description
Green icon:
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
When the distance to the detected vehicle in-
creases, the vehicle icon in the distance display
will move away.
If necessary, drive off on your own such as by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-
ing the rocker switch.
230
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Indicator lights and warning lights
Alternative icon indicators
Icon
Description
Icon
Description
White indicator light:
Indicator light green: system is
active.
No distance control display, as the
accelerator pedal is being pressed.
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
Indicator light illuminates green:
Vehicle icon flashes:
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
The system was deactivated
but applies the brakes until
you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
Indicator light flashes green:
Vehicle in front drove off.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
System interrupted.
The vehicle icon and distance
bars flash red and an acoustic
signal sounds:
Indicator light flashes gray:
Conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
Brake and make an evasive
maneuver, if necessary.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
System interrupted.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Assisted Driving View
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 155.
Displays in the Head-up display
Set speed
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display.
231
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the dis-
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national availability, for red traffic lights.
▷
▷
For cross traffic.
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations:
For oncoming traffic.
▷
▷
Active Cruise Control switched off.
Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-up display, refer to page 172.
Distance too short.
Merging vehicles
▷
▷
Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
merges into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis-
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system
requests that the driver intervene by braking
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Detection range
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
232
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Cornering
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
When the set speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Speed Limit Assistant
Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
plied.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
General information
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.
Cruise control.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-
tion.
The speed value is suggested as the new de-
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.
In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
233
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
6. "Speed limits"
7. Select the desired setting:
Safety information
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
"Show anticipation": Depending on the
national-market version: current and up-
coming speed limits are displayed in
the instrument cluster without being ap-
plied.
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
"Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
Warning
Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a driver assistance
system are activated.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Icon
Function
Depending on the equipment version,
the indicator light illuminates green,
together with the icon for a speed
control system:
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Speed Limit Assistant is active and
detected speed limits can be applied
manually for the displayed system.
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
Detected change of a speed limit with
immediate effect.
Rocker switch:
Depending on the national-market
version, it is possible to switch be-
tween the units of measurement.
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
1. "CAR"
Indicator light illuminates green: the
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
234
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Manual adoption
Adapting to route
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually for the active driver assistance system.
Principle
Depending on the national-market version, the
system can be configured so that the vehicle
adapts the speed automatically to the route.
When the SET icon illuminates, press
the button.
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations as necessary:
Speed adjustment
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.
Before a roundabout.
Before a curve.
Principle
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is
applied exactly or with a tolerance.
Adjustment
1. "CAR"
General information
You can configure a speed adaptation for all
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route"
Setting the speed adjustment
1. "CAR"
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. To perform the desired setting:
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Upcoming speed limits can only be accepted
for the Active Cruise Control.
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for
the speed adaptation that affects all
speeds.
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-
ited extent to the route ahead in the following
situations:
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-
activate additional speed adaptation.
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-
termined by the navigation system.
"Adjust speed limits": With additional
speed adjustment activated, set the
tolerance for speed limits up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
▷
With wintry road conditions.
Additional information:
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Information,
refer to page 220.
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 35.
235
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Sensors
Steering Assistant
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Principle
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle
in the lane. For this purpose, the system ex-
ecutes supporting steering movements, for in-
stance when cornering.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
General information
Depending on the speed, the system orients
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-
cles in front.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Sufficient lane width.
Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
boundary on both sides is detected.
Safety information
▷
Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
boundary on both sides or a vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Hands on the steering wheel rim.
Wide curves.
Drive in the center of the lane.
Turn signal switched off.
The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷
▷
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control active.
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function on.
Overview
▷
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation on.
Side Collision Warning active.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turning on/off
Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam
Assistant on/off.
Assisted Driving Mode
General information
Switch function on.
This button is used to switch the con-
figured function on and off.
236
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The button can be used to set the pri-
marily used function.
Turning off
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Setting the function
The indicator goes out.
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired
function is selected in the toolbar. The
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
The system does not perform supportive
steering wheel movements.
Interrupting automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
following situations:
Icon
Function
Cruise Control with Distance Control.
▷
▷
▷
At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
When the steering wheel is released.
Depending on the equipment version,
Cruise Control with Distance Control
and Steering Assistant.
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With strong steering intervention.
When leaving own lane.
When the turn signal is switched on.
When the lane is too narrow.
The selected function is shown in green.
If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer-
tain period of time and no vehicle is driving
ahead.
Turning on
▷
▷
The Active Cruise Control is interrupted.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
2.
Adjust the Steering Assistant if
necessary.
Indicator light illuminates gray.
Indicator light illuminates gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
The indicator light illuminates green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the Daytime Pe-
destrian Collision Mitigation system and the
Side Collision Warning are activated.
237
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Displays in the instrument cluster
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 155.
Icon
Description
Alternative icon indicators
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows:
Indicator light illuminates gray:
System is on standby.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is activated.
Icon
Description
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is ready.
Warning light flashes yellow:
Indicator light illuminates
green:
A lane boundary has been crossed.
The steering wheel vibrates where
applicable.
The system is activated.
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment: Warning light flashes
yellow:
Warning light illuminates yellow and
acoustic signal may sound:
System interruption is imminent.
A lane boundary has been
crossed.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: The warning
light flashes or illuminates red. A sig-
nal sounds:
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
Warning light illuminates yel-
low and acoustic signal may
sound:
The system is switched off.
Warning light illuminates yellow:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
System interruption is immi-
nent.
Warning light illuminates red, acous-
tic signal sounds:
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
sion: The warning light flashes
or illuminates red. A signal
sounds:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. System interruption is immi-
nent.
The system is switched off.
The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable.
Green steering wheel icon and
lane boundary icon:
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting steering
movements.
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within
the lane.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the
central display area of the instrument cluster.
238
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Displays in the Head-up display
Icon
Description
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up display.
Yellow steering wheel icon:
The hands are not grasping
the steering wheel. The system
is still active.
System limits
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaning-
fully used in certain situations, e.g., while tow-
ing a trailer.
Red steering wheel icon and a
signal sounds:
The hands are not grasping
the steering wheel. System in-
terruption is imminent.
Safety information
It is possible that the system
will not execute any supporting
steering movements.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
With Active Cruise Control, the
system may reduce the speed.
Displays on the steering wheel
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
ment cluster:
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
▷
▷
Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
Red: system will be deactivated.
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.
Protective covers on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel displays can be switched
on/off if required.
Narrow lanes
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in-
stance in the following situations:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Light elements"
239
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In construction areas.
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on the equipment, with auto-
matic formation of emergency lanes.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
▷
Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-
tant apply.
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
boundaries.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
▷
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Functional requirements
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering
Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 236.
The Steering Assistant is active.
▷
▷
The function is only available on certain
street types, e.g. freeways.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or
cyclists.
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode Plus helps drivers guide
their vehicle through traffic jams.
▷
▷
Sufficient lane width.
Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected.
Supporting steering movements take place
without the driver actively steering.
▷
▷
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
General information
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Assistant.
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Safety information
Turning on
Warning
As soon as all functional requirements
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
are met, an additional icon for Assisted
Driving Mode Plus will be displayed on
the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at
the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Select Assisted Driving Mode Plus
with the button on the steering wheel.
The icon for Assisted Driving Mode Plus is
shown in green.
240
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
▷
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.
Yellow: system will be interrupted.
Red: system will be deactivated.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with
vehicle control.
System limits
General information
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
Additional information:
Indicator light green: system is active.
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Driver Attention Camera
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-
tem apply.
Indicator light white: system is ready.
Additional information:
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 64.
Alternative symbol indicators
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows:
Lane Change Assistant
Principle
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.
Icon
Description
Indicator light green: system is active.
General information
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Assistant.
Displays on the steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
ment cluster:
241
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
A supporting steering movement in the re-
quired direction can be detected a short
time later.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-
tant apply.
Additional information:
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Functional requirements
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering
Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 236.
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-
ing traffic such as crash barriers.
Canceling a lane change
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction.
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
Maximum speed approx. 110 mph,
180 km/h.
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Icon
Description
Green steering wheel icon.
Switch lane change assist on/off
1. "CAR"
Green arrow icon for lane-changing.
The system carries out a lane
change.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Steering Assistance"
6. "Automatic Lane Change"
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray line for lane marking on the ap-
propriate side.
The system detected the lane change
request. Lane change not currently
possible.
Changing lanes
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
Depending on the national-market
version:
2. Press the turn signal lever in the desired
direction to the resistance point.
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray arrow icon for lane-changing.
Lane change not possible; functional
requirements not met.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
242
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the
Additional information:
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Steering Assistant, refer to page 236.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 155.
Parking assistance systems
Alternative symbol indicators
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows:
General information
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or
reversing by providing various assistance func-
tions, sensors, and camera views.
Icon
Description
Green steering wheel icon.
Additional information:
Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
Green arrow icon for lane-
changing.
Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 246.
The system carries out a lane
change.
▷
▷
Side protection, refer to page 247.
Rearview camera without Surround View,
refer to page 248.
Green steering wheel icon.
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 251.
Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of
parking space, refer to page 255.
No arrow icon for lane-chang-
ing on the display.
▷
▷
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 256.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Surround View with rearview camera, refer
to page 258.
▷
▷
▷
Panorama View, refer to page 263.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 265.
Remote 3D View, refer to page 267.
Depending on the national-
market version:
Green steering wheel icon.
Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
Park Distance Control
Gray arrow icon for lane-
changing.
Principle
Lane change not possible;
functional requirements not
met.
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, obstacles that
are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors
may also be reported by the side protection.
System limits
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
243
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
General information
Overview
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
Button in the vehicle
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is issued as early as a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Safety information
Park assistance button
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic
sensors on the side.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Warning
Turning on/off
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Turning on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷
With the engine running, when selector
lever position R is engaged.
▷
Depending on the equipment version: while
approaching detected obstacles at a speed
lower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The
activation distance depends on the situa-
tion in question.
You may switch automatic activation when ob-
stacles are detected on and off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
244
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
3. "Driver Assistance"
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound.
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
and continuous tone are switched off if the se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
Depending on equipment, an additional cam-
era view is also switched on.
Depending on design version, the intermittent
tone is switched off after a short time when the
vehicle is stationary.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain dis-
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Volume
Switch the system back on, if needed.
The volume of the Park Distance Control
acoustic signals can be adjusted.
Switching on/off manually
1. "CAR"
Press the park assistance button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Volume PDC signal"
6. Set the desired value.
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.
Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Visual warning
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re-
verse gear is engaged.
Warning
Signal tones
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. If, for example, an
object is detected at the front left of the vehi-
cle, a signal tone sounds from the front left
speaker.
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the control display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the con-
trol display before a signal sounds.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
The display appears as soon as the Park Dis-
tance Control is activated.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
The sensor detection range is shown in the
colors green, yellow, and red when obstacles
are detected there.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, with a distance
245
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Pathway lines are faded in for better estima-
tion of the space required.
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis-
played, you can switch to the Park Distance
Control or to a different view with obstacle
markings if necessary:
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ranted warnings.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip-
ment, you will be warned in the Park Distance
Control display against vehicles approaching in
the front or rear from the side.
Malfunction
A white icon appears and the sen-
sor detection range is shown by the
shaded area on the control display.
Additional information:
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 265.
A Check Control message is displayed.
System limits
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Safety information
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Active Park Distance Control
Principle
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute
risk of collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
vented under all circumstances.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
246
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,
3. "Driver Assistance"
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time.
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
6. Select the desired setting.
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-
ing Assistant.
System limits
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant
apply.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot be used in the following
situations, for example:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
▷
Active Park Distance Control is deactivated
when Hill Descent Control is active.
Hill Descent Control, refer to page 215.
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
where applicable.
Side protection
In addition, the safety information for the Park
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
Principle
The side protection warns of obstacles on the
side of the vehicle.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 251.
General information
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-
ing Assistant.
Temporary switching off
The Park Distance Control brake function can
be temporarily switched off:
Safety information
Confirm the message on the control display.
During continued driving in this surrounding
situation, no further emergency braking will oc-
cur.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Settings
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
will be protected by the system.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
247
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
In addition, the safety information for the Park
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
Additional information:
Principle
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the control display.
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 251.
Additionally, assistance functions can be
shown in the display, e.g., help lines.
Display
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
▷
▷
▷
Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles.
Gray marks, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
Overview
No marks, black area: the area next to the
vehicle was not yet captured.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
button in the vehicle
Limits of the side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
the marks are shown in black after a certain
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
newly captured.
In addition, the limits of the systems of the
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-
ing Assistant apply.
Park assistance button
248
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
ited by protruding cargo, a rear-mounted
luggage rack, or a trailer.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Display on the control display
▷
Rearview camera.
Additional information:
Toolbars
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
The assistance functions can be activated
manually via the toolbars on the sides of the
control display.
Turning on/off
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
Turning on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se-
lector lever position R is engaged when the
engine is running.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
3.
▷
"Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning circle lines
are displayed.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
▷
"Obstacle mark.".
The system switches off when a certain dis-
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.
Depending on the equipment, the ob-
stacles detected by the Park Distance
Control are displayed by marks.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
More than one assistance function can be ac-
tive at the same time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually
Parking aid lines
Press the park assistance button.
General information
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.
Off: the LED goes out.
Additional assistance functions can be shown
in the camera image on the control display.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the control display.
More than one assistance function can be ac-
tive at the same time.
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.
2.
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements
▷
The tailgate is fully closed.
▷
Keep the camera's detection range free.
The camera's detection range can be lim-
249
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Pathway lines
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
Turning circle lines
Depending on the equipment, obstacles be-
hind the vehicle are detected by the Park Dis-
tance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the im-
age of the rearview camera.
The colored steps of the obstacle markings
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.
Setting brightness and contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
2.
"Camera image"
3. Select the desired setting.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
250
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
orients itself with the middle of the parking
space.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Depending on the equipment version: when
driving out of parallel parking spaces.
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The
system status is displayed.
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
General information
Depending on the equipment, some assis-
tance functions also take into account data
from the Park Distance Control.
Operating principle
The operating principle and operation of the
system is divided into the following steps:
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control
chapter.
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.
Turning on.
The objects displayed on the control display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-
play.
Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac-
tions are displayed on the control display.
Automatic Parking Assistant
Parking space search
Parking space search is always active when-
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the control display are shown in gray.
Principle
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the
driver in the following situations:
▷
When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
vated and the parking space search is active.
▷
When reverse parking perpendicular to the
road, perpendicular parking. The system
Control display shows suitable parking spaces
at the edge of the road next to the vehicle icon.
When Automatic Parking Assistant is active,
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and an
acoustic signal sounds.
251
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
detected, the system automatically adjusts the
suitable parking method. In the case of parking
spaces suitable for parallel and diagonal park-
ing, a selection menu is displayed. In this case,
the desired parking method must be selected
manually.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
Tailgate, refer to page 104.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Steptronic transmission
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates
the best possible parking line and takes control
of the following functions during the parking
operation:
▷
▷
▷
Steering.
Acceleration and braking.
Changing gears.
The parking operation is automatic.
Park assistance button
Safety information
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional requirements
For the measurement of parking
spaces
Warning
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
Longitudinal parking:
In addition, the safety information for the Park
Distance Control and for opening the tailgate
apply.
252
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,
parking vehicle: approx. 3.3 ft/1 m
Switching on via iDrive
The display of the rearview camera or the view
of the Park Distance Control must be active.
Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Activate the Automatic Parking Assistant
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
on the control display:
"Autom. Parking"
Perpendicular parking:
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,
parking vehicle: approx. 3.3 ft/1 m
Turning off
The system can be switched off manually:
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
Press the park assistance button.
The LED goes out.
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to ap-
proximate the depth of perpendicular park-
ing spaces.
Status of the system
Icon
Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
Parking operation
▷
Doors and tailgate are closed.
Steptronic transmission:
Driver's seat belt is fastened.
System is activated.
▷
Parking space search is active.
The parking operation is active. The
system takes over the steering.
Turning on/turning off
Switching on with the button
Turning the acoustic signal for
suitable parking spaces on/off
1. "CAR"
Press the park assistance button.
The LED illuminates.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the control display.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated
automatically.
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Automatic Parking"
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
Switching on with reverse gear
1. Shift into reverse.
Acoustic signals of the Park
Distance Control
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the control display.
Depending on national-market version, an
intermittent tone for Park Distance Control
sounds during an automatic parking operation.
2. If necessary, activate:
"Autom. Parking"
253
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
A continuous tone sounds when the distance
to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in-
ches/20 cm.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
1. For the parking space search, drive past
parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx.
22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of max.
5 ft/1.5 m.
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷
▷
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome such as curbs.
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear.
The parking space search is activated.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display.
The Park Distance Control indicates distan-
ces that are too small.
When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
2. Engage reverse or press the Park Assist
key.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
vated.
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on
the control display.
3. Select the suggested parking space for the
parking maneuver on the control display.
The turn signal opposite to the desired
parking side is switched on.
The parking operation is active. The sys-
tem takes over the steering.
Steptronic transmission:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the tailgate is open.
If doors are open.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Steptronic transmission:
When setting the parking brake.
During acceleration.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
The brake pedal remains depressed for
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.
The end of the parking operation is indi-
cated on the control display.
▷
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing the parking operation
An interrupted parking operation can be con-
tinued, if needed.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter-
rupted at any time:
Reactivate the Automatic Parking Assistant
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
▷
Press the park assistance button.
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the
control display.
254
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
System limits
Safety information
Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be
operational. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Driving out of a parking
space using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
fer assistance in the following situations:
▷
▷
In tight curves.
Principle
For parking spaces that are only marked
with lines on the ground. The system ori-
ents itself according to objects.
The system makes driving out of parallel park-
ing spaces easier.
▷
For diagonal parking spaces.
General information
Note the information given in the “Automatic
Parking Assistant” section.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.
Steptronic transmission
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates an
optimal line for pulling out of a parking space
and takes control of the following functions
during the maneuver:
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷
▷
▷
Steering.
Accelerating and braking.
Changing gears.
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver
can drive out of the parking space without fur-
ther steering movements.
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷
▷
With a mounted emergency wheel.
In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
255
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
tionary to switch on the Automatic Parking
Assistant.
Safety information
3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate
the Automatic Parking Assistant on the
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
control display:
"Autom. Parking"
4. Select the desired direction to drive out of
the parking space on the control display.
5. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
The parking operation is active.
Steptronic transmission:
The system takes control of the maneuver.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
In addition, the safety instructions for the Park
Distance Control, the Automatic Parking Assis-
tant and for opening the tailgate apply.
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
off automatically.
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 251.
▷
Tailgate, refer to page 104.
System limits
The driving out of a parking space function
may not be offered temporarily under certain
environmental conditions. The system limits of
the Park Distance Control and the Automatic
Parking Assistant continue to apply.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle was parked manually and ob-
jects in front of and behind the car are de-
tected. The distance to a detected curb is at
least 6 inches/15 cm.
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant and an object is
detected in front of the vehicle.
Back-up assistant
Principle
▷
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than the vehicle.
The Back-up Assistant helps the driver when
reversing, e.g., when driving out of tight or un-
clear parking or road situations.
The vehicle has been parked in reverse.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance
covered can be driven back with automated
steering.
Driving out of a parking space using
the Automatic Parking Assistant
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Steptronic transmission:
Press the park assistance button or shift
into reverse gear when the vehicle is sta-
General information
The system takes control of the steering when
driving in reverse along the stored route.
256
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The driver controls driving the vehicle via ac-
celerator pedal and brake.
Driving in reverse with automated
steering
1. Press the park assistance button or shift
into reverse gear when the vehicle is
stationary and the drive-ready state is
switched on.
The Back-up Assistant uses the operating ele-
ments and sensors of the Park Distance Con-
trol and the Automatic Parking Assistant.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 251.
The system takes over the steering.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play where required.
Safety information
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel
and carefully drive off using the accelerator
pedal and the brake.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
When driving in reverse, pay attention to
the vehicle's surroundings, and if you en-
counter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
6. Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle
such as by shifting to a forward gear.
At the end of the stored distance travelled,
a signal will sound and a request will be
displayed, also with the instruction to take
control of the vehicle.
In addition, the safety instructions for the Park
Distance Control, the Automatic Parking Assis-
tant and for opening the tailgate apply.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 251.
▷
Tailgate, refer to page 104.
▷
▷
Via touchscreen:
"Back-up Assistant"
Functional requirements
Press the button.
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered.
▷
▷
A maximum of 165 ft/50 meters are stored.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 22 mph/36 km/h.
▷
Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
257
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
Surround View
▷
▷
When engaging a forward gear.
Principle
During activation or intervention by driving
control systems or assist systems.
The Surround View uses various vehicle cam-
eras, for instance, a rearview camera and front
camera to assist with parking and maneuver-
ing. Depending on the view, the vehicle's sur-
roundings or a part of it is depicted on the con-
trol display.
▷
▷
After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
The vehicle leaves the stored lane when re-
versing, for instance at maximum steering
angle.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from differ-
ent selectable perspectives.
▷
The view on the control display is overlaid
with messages such as incoming calls.
System limits
▷
The following camera perspectives can be dis-
played:
When you reach normal road traffic or if you
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately
and take over control of the vehicle.
▷
The automatic camera perspective auto-
matically shows the appropriate perspec-
tive according to the respective driving sit-
uation.
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is
limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warn-
ing is issued and the function may be can-
celed.
▷
▷
▷
The rearview camera shows the areas be-
hind the vehicle.
The flank view on the right and left shows
the areas on the sides of the vehicle.
▷
▷
After driving a stored distance covered with
major steering-wheel angles, the function
of the system will be limited for the return
trip.
The free camera perspective, which can be
moved via iDrive, shows defined perspec-
tives on a circular path.
In addition, the limits of the systems of the
Park Distance Control and the Automatic
Parking Assistant apply.
▷
The Panorama View shows crossing traffic,
depending on the gear currently engaged.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-
ents or inclines.
258
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.
Off: the LED goes out.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Depending on the equipment version, the rear-
view camera cannot be switched off when the
reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain dis-
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Display on the control display
Overview
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Additional information:
1
Toolbar, left
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Camera image
Side view
Turning on/off
Automatic camera perspective
Movable unobstructed camera perspective
Toolbar, right
Turning on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se-
lector lever position R is engaged when the
engine is running.
Rearview camera
Selection window
The camera perspective suitable for the re-
spective driving situation is displayed.
Toolbar on the left
The left toolbar can be used for the direct se-
lection of various views via iDrive. Move the
Controller to the left, if needed.
Additional information:
Park Distance Control, turn on/off, refer to
page 244.
▷
▷
▷
"Parking": around the vehicle.
"3D view": available camera.
"Car wash".
Switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
259
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Side view
Toolbar on the right
The side view can be selected for the right or
left vehicle side.
Assistance functions can be activated and
settings can be entered via the right toolbar
via iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if
needed.
This view shows the vehicle's side surround-
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
▷
▷
▷
"Autom. Parking".
"Back-up Assistant".
"Camera image":
The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
sible obstacles.
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Brightness".
"Contrast".
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
ing direction.
"Parking aid lines".
"Obstacle mark.".
▷
"Settings": apply settings, for instance
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
ing situation.
to use the activation points for Panorama
View.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front
or at the rear behind the bumper or, if neces-
sary, changes to a side view.
Rearview camera
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the control display.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
the system uses a fixed perspective of the
rearview camera. If necessary, manually se-
lect the automatic camera perspective when
reverse gear is engaged. The automatic cam-
era perspective will be retained for the current
parking operation.
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se-
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Parking aid lines
General information
Movable unobstructed camera
perspective
With selection of the movable camera perspec-
tive, a circle appears on the control display.
Additional assistance functions can be shown
in the camera image on the control display.
More than one assistance function can be ac-
tive at the same time.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se-
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon.
To leave the function, move the Controller
sideways and select another camera view.
260
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Pathway lines
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
Turning circle lines
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam-
era image.
The colored steps of the obstacle markings
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.
Car wash view
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's
own track.
261
Driver assistance systems
Display
CONTROLS
Side protection
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
Display
Steptronic transmission: the maximum open-
ing angles of the doors are displayed in selec-
tor lever position P. As soon as the vehicle be-
gins moving, the opening angles are replaced
by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
Even if the icons for the door opening angles
do not cross other objects on the control dis-
play, the following needs to be noted when
parking next to other objects:
▷
▷
No marks: no obstacles were detected.
Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
Limits of the side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2.
"Camera image"
3. Select the desired setting.
Functional limitations
Door opening angle
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
Principle
If obstacle marking is activated, the Surround
View indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
▷
▷
▷
In poor light.
In case of soiled cameras.
With a door open.
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
proaching road users.
262
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
With the tailgate open.
Panorama View
With exterior mirrors folded in.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown such as an open door.
Principle
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Panorama View gives you an earlier view of
crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and in-
tersections.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam-
eras in the front and rear capture the side
areas around the vehicle to improve the view.
Some assistance functions also take into con-
sideration data from the Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control
chapter.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
front and rear end of the vehicle.
The objects displayed on the control display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-
play.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
Depending on the equipment version, the
function can only be used when driving for-
ward.
Additional information:
Park Distance Control, refer to page 243.
Additional information:
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
Surround View, refer to page 258.
Safety information
A yellow icon appears and the mal-
functioning camera's detection range is
shown in black on the control display.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
263
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's
surroundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 265.
With navigation system: activation
points
Principle
Overview
Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a Global Positioning Sys-
tem signal is received.
Button in the vehicle
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for-
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1. Drive to the position at which the system is
to be switched on, and stop.
Panorama View
2.
Press the button.
Sensors
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Activation point"
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
The current position is displayed.
5. "Save activation point"
▷
▷
Front camera.
Depending on the equipment: rearview
camera.
Activation points are stored with one of the
following pieces of information if possible:
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
With the city/town and the street.
With the GPS coordinates.
Display on the control display
Press the button when the engine is run-
ning.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
Depending on the driving direction, the image
of the respective camera is displayed:
▷
▷
"Front": front camera image.
"Rear": rear camera image.
1.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross
traffic warning can additionally warn of ap-
proaching vehicles using radar sensors.
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
when set activation points are reached."
Additional information:
264
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Displaying activation points
General information
1.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Press the button.
Renaming or deleting activation points
1.
Press the button.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3.
"Manage points"
The system indicates approaching road users.
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-
sors are located in the front bumpers.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5. Select the desired setting.
Functional limitations
The Surround View functional limitations ap-
ply.
Safety information
Additional information:
Warning
Surround View, refer to page 258.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
System limits
The limits of the Surround View system apply.
Additional information:
Surround View, refer to page 258.
Cross traffic warning
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
265
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
5. "Cross traffic warning"
Overview
6. "Cross traffic warning"
Button in the vehicle
Turning on automatically
If the system was activated on the control dis-
play, it will automatically be turned on as soon
as the Park Distance Control or the Panorama
View is active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Park assistance button
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.
When a certain distance travelled is ex-
ceeded.
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
▷
With an active parking operation of the Au-
tomatic Parking Assistant.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Warning
Turning on/off
General information
The control display shows the corresponding
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-
ror flashes.
Activating/deactivating the system
With the button
1.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
Press the park assistance button.
4. "Cross traffic warning"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
266
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Warning light in exterior mirror
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into
the respective direction.
System limits
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Display in the Park Distance Control
view
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
▷
In tight curves.
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
Remote 3D View
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
Principle
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the My
BMW App and images from the Surround View
cameras enable you to display the vehicle’s
surroundings on a mobile device.
Display in the camera view
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
tion.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Additional information:
267
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Functional requirements
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷
Data transfer must be activated.
Data protection, refer to page 68.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully operational or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile end device.
ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile
with an existing ConnectedDrive account
must be activated.
▷
With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields
in the display indicate areas that are not
recorded by the system.
Driver profiles, refer to page 69.
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
Switching the function on/off
When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
Switching on/off with other functions
1. "CAR"
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
2. "Settings"
It may not be possible to use the function in
every country.
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two
hours.
5. Select the desired setting.
Switching on/off individually
Pre-adjustment
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Select services individually"
6. "My BMW App and portal"
7. "Remote 3D View"
Turning on/off
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Individual selection"
268
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
as, depending on the equipment, the selected
driving mode.
Vehicle features and options
Additional information:
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Driving Experience Control, refer to page 138.
Adaptive M chassis
Principle
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, con-
trollable sport chassis.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
Chassis components
The chassis components are optimized for the
vehicle and its application range and thereby
ensure the best possible driving experience.
General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-
pending on the road condition and driving
style.
Adaptive suspension
Setting
Principle
The system offers different shock absorber
settings ranging from comfortable travel to
sporty driving.
The adaptive suspension is an intelligent con-
trollable suspension.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
on the selected driving mode as well as the
road condition and driving style.
General information
Additional information:
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-
pending on the road condition and driving
style.
Driving Experience Control, refer to page 138.
Engine sound
Setting
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, you can configure the sound
of the engine.
The system offers different shock absorber
settings ranging from comfortable travel to
sporty driving.
1. "CAR"
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
on the road condition and driving style as well
2. "Settings"
269
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
3. "General settings"
4. "Engine sound"
5. Select the desired setting.
270
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control
▷
▷
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
Vehicle features and options
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Air quality
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.
Interior filter.
Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Climate control functions
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pre-ventilation.
Ionizer.
Button
Function
Fragrancing.
Temperature.
Automatic recirculated-air control.
Air recirculation mode.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
Depending on the equipment:
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
Air flow, manual.
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Switching off.
Intensity AUTO program.
271
Climate control
CONTROLS
Switching climate control functions
on/off
Button
Function
Air distribution, manual.
Turning on
Press one of the following buttons:
Defrost function.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Rear window defroster.
Climate menu.
Maximum cooling.
Depending on the equipment:
Seat heating, refer to page 126.
AUTO program.
Air recirculation mode.
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrosting the windshield
or
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 127.
Turning off
Air conditioning.
Complete system:
Open Climate menu such as
for the following settings: up-
per body temperature adjust-
ment, pre-ventilation.
Press and hold the button until the
integrated automatic climate control
switches off.
Some of the functions can also be used via
voice, e.g., temperature.
Temperature
Principle
Opening the Climate menu
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
Press the button.
The Climate menu is displayed.
Setting the temperature
Using the button:
For example, the following climate control
functions can be accessed via the Climate
menu:
Press the upper or lower button side
to set the desired temperature.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fragrance.
Air quality.
Via iDrive:
Heating/ventilation.
Pre-ventilation/heating
Air conditioning.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Temperature:"
Individual settings can be entered for some of
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in-
tensity.
272
Climate control
CONTROLS
7. Set the desired temperature.
8. "OK"
Press the button.
Via iDrive:
Do not rapidly change between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "A/C"
Temperature of the ventilation
General information
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body area can be adjusted.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body
area heats or cools noticeably, depending on
the adjusted temperature.
Air conditioning is switched on automatically
with the AUTO program.
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
This does not change the set interior tempera-
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Maximum cooling
Adjust temperature of the ventilation
1. "CAR"
Principle
2. "Settings"
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
with the drive-ready state switched on.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Temperature adjustment"
6. Set the desired temperature.
Functional requirement
The function is available at an outside temper-
ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
Switching maximum cooling on/off
Air conditioning
Press the button.
Principle
The LED is illuminated when maxi-
mum cooling is switched on.
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-
midified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
area. The air vents need to be open for this.
Functional requirement
The interior can only be cooled with the drive-
ready state switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
Switch air conditioning on/off
Using the button:
273
Climate control
CONTROLS
Adjusting the intensity of the air flow
AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, the in-
tensity can be adjusted. This changes the au-
tomatic control for the air mass.
Principle
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
Using the button:
The air distribution and the temperature are
controlled automatically depending on the in-
terior temperature and the desired tempera-
ture setting including the selected intensity of
the air flow.
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase intensity.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching the AUTO program on/off
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver"
Using the button:
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
with the AUTO program switched on.
6. "Level"
7. Set the desired intensity.
Via iDrive:
The selected intensity is shown on the climate
control display.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Automatic recirculated-air control
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver"
Principle
The automatic recirculated-air control recog-
nizes pollutants in the outside air. The outside
air supply is shut off and the interior air is recir-
culated.
6. "Automatic"
Depending on the selected settings and out-
side influences, the air is directed to the wind-
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the
footwell.
General information
Point the side air vents toward the side win-
dows.
If the system is activated, a sensor detects
pollutants in the outside air and controls the
shut-off automatically.
The air conditioning is switched on with the
AUTO program.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin-
uously flows into the interior.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
With constant air recirculation mode, the air
quality in the interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
The AUTO program is switched off automati-
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
If there is window condensation, switch off re-
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.
274
Climate control
CONTROLS
If there is window condensation, switch off re-
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.
Switching automatic recirculated-air
control on/off
1. "CAR"
Air flow, manual
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Automatic"
Principle
The air flow for air conditioning can be ad-
justed manually.
General information
Air recirculation mode
To adjust the air flow manually switch off
AUTO program first.
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the interior air.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase air flow.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
The selected air flow is shown on the climate
control display.
Switch air recirculation on/off
Using the button:
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
vehicle battery.
Press the button.
Manual air distribution
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the air-recirculation mode is switched
on.
Principle
The air distribution for air conditioning can be
adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Adjusting the air distribution manually
2. "Settings"
Press the button repeatedly. Select
the desired setting:
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windows, upper body area, and footwell.
Upper body area and footwell.
Footwell.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
"Air recirculation"
"Fresh air"
Windows and footwell.
Windows.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer-
tain amount of time, depending on the envi-
ronmental conditions.
Windows and upper body area.
Upper body area.
With constant air recirculation mode, the air
quality in the interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
The selected air distribution is shown on the
climate control display.
275
Climate control
CONTROLS
SYNC program
Rear window defroster
Principle
Principle
The Sync program can be used to apply the
settings on the driver's side to the passenger’s
side.
Ice and condensation are removed from the
rear window quickly.
Functional requirement
The function is operational when the drive-
ready state is switched on.
Switching the SYNC program on/off
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching rear window defroster on/off
3. "Climate control"
4. "Synchronize"
Press the button. The LED is illu-
minated with rear window defroster
switched on.
The following settings of the driver's side can
be transferred to the passenger's side:
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
AUTO program.
Ventilation
The program is switched off automatically if
the settings on the front passenger side are
changed.
Principle
The air flow directions can be adjusted individ-
ually for direct or indirect ventilation.
Defrost function
Setting the ventilation
Principle
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective air conditioning.
Switching the Defrost function on/off
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directed towards the passen-
gers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on.
Indirect ventilation
The air flow is not directed towards the pas-
sengers. The vehicle interior is warmed or
cooled indirectly, depending on the set tem-
perature.
If there is window condensation, switch on the
AUTO program or the air conditioning to utilize
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air
can flow to the windshield.
276
Climate control
CONTROLS
Front ventilation
Rear automatic climate
control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
rows 1.
Knurled wheel for variable opening and
closing of the air vents, arrows 2.
Ventilation in rear, center
Climate control functions
Button
Function
Temperature.
AUTO program.
Air distribution, manual.
Seat heating, refer to page 126.
Switching off.
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
rows 1.
Knurled wheel for variable opening and
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Switching climate control functions
on/off
Functional requirement
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
277
Climate control
CONTROLS
The selected temperature is shown on the cli-
mate control display.
Switching on/off using iDrive
1. "CAR"
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Activate heating/cooling"
AUTO program
Principle
Switching on using the button
The air flow, air distribution and the tempera-
ture are controlled automatically.
Press one of the following buttons:
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
AUTO program.
Switching the AUTO program on/off
Using the button:
Air distribution, manual.
Press the button.
Switching off using the button
The LED of the button is illuminated
with the AUTO program switched on.
Press the button.
Via iDrive:
Temperature
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Principle
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Automatic"
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
Setting the temperature
Using the button:
Depending on the selected settings and out-
side influences, the air is directed to the upper
body and into the floor area.
Press the left or right button side to
set the desired temperature.
Manual air distribution
Via iDrive:
Principle
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
The air distribution for air conditioning can be
adjusted manually.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Temperature:"
7. Set the desired temperature.
Adjusting the air distribution manually
Press the button repeatedly. Select
the desired setting:
278
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Upper body area.
Upper body area and footwell.
Footwell.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
Locking the operating elements
▷
▷
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Principle
The operating elements of the rear automatic
climate control can be disabled.
Open the air vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
General information
There are different ways to switch the system
on or off.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Disable controller"
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
Using the button
Pre-ventilation
Functional requirement
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-
ventilation can be switched on or off with the
automatic climate control buttons.
Principle
The car's interior can be cooled or heated
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.
Turning on
Press one of the following buttons:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
The activation time is determined based on
the outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
Air recirculation mode.
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrosting the windshield
Functional requirements
Turning off
Press and hold the bottom button.
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
279
Climate control
CONTROLS
The system switches off after leaving and lock-
ing the vehicle.
Departure time
Principle
Via iDrive
Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure.
Turning on
1. "CAR"
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Start now"
The system is switched on once.
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on before the set departure
time.
Via BMW display key
Turning on
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
▷
▷
Set departure times.
Activate departure times.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting/activating the departure time
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-
ficient period of time for the air conditioning.
3. Tap the
icon or the
icon.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Setting the departure time
Turning off
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Preconditioning setting"
2. "Settings"
3. Tap the
4. "Stop"
icon or the
icon.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
9. "OK"
Display
Icon
Description
Icon on the climate control
display.
Flashing: the pre-ventila-
tion is switched on.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the
icon or the
icon.
280
Climate control
CONTROLS
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may
be removed more easily.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Safety information
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
DANGER
To switch on the pre-ventilation automatically
at the departure time, the departure time must
be activated first.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas
with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed
garages.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Activate the desired departure time.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Warning
When pre-conditioning is in operation, high
temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system. If combustible materials such as
leaves or grass come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materials
can ignite. There is a risk of fire, injury, and
property damage. Make sure that no com-
bustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts during pre-conditioning, e.g.
leaves, grass, natural gas, gasoline, oil or
other combustible objects.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the
icon or the
icon.
4. Tap on the icon.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
,
Icon on the climate control display
signals an activated departure time.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable
temperature. The system automatically cools,
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-
▷
▷
Battery is sufficiently charged.
For reasons of safety, the system can only
be switched on twice consecutively. The
281
Climate control
CONTROLS
system will be available again as soon as
the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
▷
▷
▷
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
Hood is closed.
Press the button on the vehicle key three
times within 1 second.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
After operating the vehicle key, it will take
approximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
▷
Air vents are opened.
To switch off the system, press the button
again three times.
Enabling the automatic engine start
function
The automatic engine start must be enabled
once before using the system. Otherwise, the
engine cannot switch on automatically to cli-
matize the car's interior.
Switching on via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
Via iDrive:
3.
Tap on the icon.
1. "CAR"
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Remote Engine Start"
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
Switching off via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3.
Tap on the icon.
Switching on/off directly
4. "Stop"
General information
The system switches off automatically after
approx. 15 minutes.
Switching off with the Start/Stop
button
The system can be switched off directly as fol-
lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without
depressing the brake pedal.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive-
ready state is activated and deactivated again.
Switching on via departure time
Switching on via iDrive
1. "CAR"
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
ture.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Start now"
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
282
Climate control
CONTROLS
The system is switched on once.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷
▷
Set departure times.
Activating the departure time via iDrive
1. "CAR"
Activate departure times.
The climate control function will start approx-
imately 10 minutes before the set departure
time and continue for approximately 5 more
minutes after the departure time.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting/activating the departure time
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-
ficient period of time for the air conditioning.
6. Activate the desired departure time.
Activating the departure time via BMW
display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on once. The system will be available
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti-
vated and deactivated again.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
Observe the information about the intended
use of the vehicle.
3.
Tap on the icon.
4. Activating the desired departure time:
Tap on the icon.
Additional information:
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.
Display
Adjusting the departure time via iDrive
1. "CAR"
In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
The icon on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time.
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start
is running.
Adjusting the departure time via BMW
display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
The parking lights are switched on as long as
the system is switched on.
3.
Tap on the icon.
283
Climate control
CONTROLS
Ionizer
Ambient air package
Principle
Principle
The Ambient Air Package cleans and scents
the interior air with selected fragrances.
The ionizer cleans the car's interior air of sus-
pended particles and improves the air quality.
Switching the ionizer on/off
1. "CAR"
General information
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possi-
ble by exchanging the fragrance cartridges.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
The following criteria can influence the percep-
tion of scents in the vehicle interior:
5. "Ionization"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic climate control settings.
Temperature and moisture.
Time of day and season.
Fragrancing
General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to
avoid a habituation effect.
Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,
for instance fatigue.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the
vehicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can
occur prior to the trip. The system is automati-
cally switched on with the pre-ventilation if fra-
grancing was switched on at the completion of
the last trip.
Safety information
Warning
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges
can cause the emission of harmful substan-
ces, malfunctions, and damage to the sys-
tem. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Do not refill genuine fra-
grance cartridges. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently fil-
led.
The interior temperature is be-
tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
Open the air vents to allow the fragrance to
flow out.
Opening the Climate menu
Press the button.
Selecting the fragrance
The car's interior is fragranced depending on
the selected fragrance.
The Climate comfort menu is displayed.
Individual settings can be entered for some of
the climate control functions.
284
Climate control
CONTROLS
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
The cartridge holder slides down.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
5. Select the desired fragrance.
Switching fragrancing on/off, adjusting
intensity
1. "CAR"
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance car-
tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide
it from the fragrance cartridge.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
5. "Level"
6. Select the desired setting.
Display
The illustrations on the control display show
the actual fill level of the fragrance cartridges.
4. Insert the removed cover on the rear of the
fragrance cartridge.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indi-
cated, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry-
ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient
for fragrancing.
When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a
Check Control message is displayed once.
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Front passenger side glove compartment,
refer to page 296.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
285
Climate control
CONTROLS
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
6. Slide the fragrance cartridge into the car-
tridge holder at a slight angle without ap-
plying pressure. The fragrance cartridge
is correctly positioned when the cartridge
holder can be closed.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
indicated on the control display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra-
grance indicated on the control display.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en-
gages.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could
be impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Recycling
Front passenger side glove compartment,
refer to page 296.
Empty fragrance cartridges can be
taken to an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop for recycling.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
286
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Safety information
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control
such as the garage door may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Integrated universal remote
control
Compatibility
Principle
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
system to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Uni-
versal Remote Control.
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions
of remote-controlled systems such as garage
door drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
Additional questions are answered by:
General information
▷
An authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control re-
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior mirror must be programmed with
the desired functions. The hand-held transmit-
ter for the particular system is required in order
to program the remote control.
▷
on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re-
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best
possible operation.
287
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
Operating elements on the interior
mirror
6.
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
▷
The LED flashes fast: programming is
not complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror
for 2 seconds and release. Perform this
procedure three times to complete the
programming procedure.
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.
LED, arrow 2.
The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re-
quired for programming.
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for change
code wireless systems.
Programming
▷
LED does not flash green after 60 sec-
onds: programming not completed.
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
be fully charged at the time of programming
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other buttons,
repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Initial commissioning:
If you are unable to operate the remote-con-
trolled system after repeated programming,
please check if the system to be controlled fea-
tures a rolling code radio system.
Press and hold the two outer buttons
on the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-
gramming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
Refer to the operating instructions for the sys-
tem.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro-
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror
will slowly begin flashing orange.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys-
tem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to
30 cm away from the buttons on the inte-
rior mirror. The required distance depends
on the hand-held transmitter.
Please read the operating instructions to find
out how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec-
ond person.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
288
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
Release the button.
▷
The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but program-
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
Press the button on the interior mirror
for 2 seconds and release. Perform this
procedure three times to complete the
programming procedure.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed, e.g. at
the garage gate. You have approx. 30 sec-
onds for the next step.
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for change
code wireless systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to end syn-
chronization. Once synchronization is com-
plete, the programmed function will be car-
ried out.
▷
LED does not flash green after 60 sec-
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not com-
pleted, the previous programming will remain
unchanged.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Turn on standby state.
Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds,
release the button.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control
such as the garage door may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys-
tem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to
30 cm away from the buttons on the inte-
rior mirror. The required distance depends
on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
The system such as the garage door can be
operated using the button on the interior mir-
ror while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays illuminated while the wireless signal is
being transmitted.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways.
▷
The LED illuminates green: the pro-
gramming procedure is completed.
289
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func-
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Safety information
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior
mirror flashes green fast.
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior while
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Make sure that devices
and cables are not in the airbag's area of
unfolding.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Warning
Folding out
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
electrical system. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
jump-start terminals in the engine compart-
ment.
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window.
Folding in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Warning
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,
these objects can cause a short circuit and
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Make sure to
prevent metal objects from falling or being
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after
using the socket.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
290
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Front center console
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
Additional information:
USB connections, refer to page 81.
Safety information
Slide the cover forward.
Warning
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,
these objects can cause a short circuit and
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Make sure to
prevent metal objects from falling or being
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after
using the socket.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Detach the cover.
In the center armrest
In the cargo area
A USB port is located in the center armrest.
Properties:
A socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area. Unfold the cover.
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: max. 3 A.
291
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
In the front center console
In the rear center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,
large USB connectors, may block or damage
the cover when it is being opened or closed.
There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the cover
is clear while opening and closing it.
Two USB ports are located in the center con-
sole in the rear passenger compartment.
Properties:
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
Wireless charging tray
Slide the cover forward.
Principle
The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General information
When inserting the device to be charged, en-
sure that there are no objects between the de-
vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
A USB port is located in the center console.
Properties:
The charging process is shown by the
charge indicator on the control display.
▷
▷
USB port Type A.
For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
NOTE
▷
Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
This device has been tested for human expo-
sure limits and found compliant at a minimum
distance of 2 in/5 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating
the device.
292
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
▷
The device to be charged must be certified
according to the Qi standard.
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1
x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
Mounting position of the product.
Safety information
Warning
The mobile phone to be charged is located
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
display is pointing upwards.
Inserting the mobile phone
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-
tion correctly when placed together on the
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. When charging
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-
jects on the tray together with the device.
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue
The mobile phone is charging.
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted mobile phone with Qi
capability is fully charged.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
Or-
The mobile phone is not charging.
ange
Temperature of the mobile phone
may be too high or foreign object
may be in charging tray.
Red
The mobile phone is not charging.
Contact an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
1
LED
2
Storage area
293
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Forgotten warning
LTE-Compensator - Information
and User Manual
General information
A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile
phone was forgotten in the wireless charging
tray when leaving the vehicle.
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure
the best possible connection a signal booster
(LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with
the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to
this booster:
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning
1. "CAR"
This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
DEVICE with your wireless provider and have
your provider's consent. Most wireless provid-
ers consent to the use of Compensators. Some
providers may not consent to the use of this
device on their network. If you are unsure,
contact your provider. You MUST operate this
device with approved antennas and cables
as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas
MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches)
from any person. You MUST cease operating
this device immediately if requested by the
FCC or a licensed wireless service provider.
Warning E911 location information may not be
provided or may be inaccurate for calls served
by using this device.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Activate reminder"
System limits
The charge current may be reduced or charg-
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
less charging tray in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-
face of the tray and mobile phone.
If there are objects between the mobile
phone and the wireless charging tray.
Please observe additionally the following infor-
mation
If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards for signal transmission, are located
between the mobile phone and wireless
charging tray.
▷
▷
▷
Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to regis-
ter their signal boosters by calling their toll-
free number.
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
T-Mobile online registration link:
Due to protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
parts.
Verizon’s online registra-
nal-booster.html).
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for mobile phone, e.g.,
holders.
▷
▷
AT&T online registration
By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
U.S.Cellular online registration
lar/support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).
294
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Before use you must register your booster de-
vice with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease
operating your booster you are not allowed to
insert your mobile phone in the charging tray
anymore unless the booster is permanently
deactivated by your local BMW dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the car
nor use it with any other than the preinstalled
coupling device or antenna. Any modification
of the existing antenna or coupling device as
well as the use of other antennas or coupling
devices will cause the cease of the booster´s
operating license.
The booster device fulfills the network protec-
tion standards as required by the FCC such as
intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and
gain limits.
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
Model Number: LTECOMPB0
Part Number: 6803145-01
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
295
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
the event of an accident or when braking or
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Always close storage compartments
immediately after use.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
could come loose. There is a risk of injury and
risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
Storage compartments
Glove compartment
General information
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Opening the glove compartment
Safety information
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Pull the handle.
Closing the glove compartment
Fold the lid closed.
Warning
Locking the glove compartment
Open flaps of the storage compartments,
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,
protrude into the interior when folded open
and may be in the way of an airbag that
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment has been locked,
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-
296
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
out the integrated key, for example, when the
car is being parked by a parking attendant.
Storage compartment in the
center console
Additional information:
Integrated key, refer to page 97.
Opening the storage compartment
Fold-out compartment
Opening the fold-out compartment
Slide the cover forward.
Closing the storage compartment
Slide the cover rearward.
Pull the handle.
Storage compartment in the
rear center console
Storage compartments in
the doors
Depending on the equipment, there are one or
two stowage compartments in the rear center
console.
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Center armrest, front
Safety information
General information
Warning
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or
glasses can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Do not use any breakable
objects while driving. Only stow breakable
objects in closed storage compartments.
297
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Opening the storage compartment
Opening the cup holder
Press the button.
Slide the cover forward.
Closing the storage compartment
Press the lid down until it engages.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Two cup holders are located in the center con-
sole.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury and risk of property
damage. Do not force objects into the cup
holder. Make sure that drink containers are
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do
not transport hot beverages.
Closing the cup holder
Slide the cover rearward.
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury and risk of property
damage. Do not force objects into the cup
298
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
holder. Make sure that drink containers are
Safety information
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do
not transport hot beverages.
Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. When
suspending clothing articles from the coat
hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the
driver's view.
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
property damage. Press back the covers be-
fore the center armrest is folded up.
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the coat hooks.
Opening and closing the cup holder
Opening the cup holder
Fold the center armrest forward.
Press the button.
Closing the cup holder
Press both covers back inward in sequence
and fold the center armrest back.
Coat hooks
General information
Two folding coat hooks are provided on the
headliner in the rear of the vehicle. Press side-
ways onto the edge to fold open.
299
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific, and optional equipment offered with
the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in the
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or
country versions. This also applies to safety
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Safety information
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
vehicle’s placard.
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-
ducing directional stability, lengthening the
braking distances and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,
and property damage. Pay attention to the
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle
weight.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs).
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
300
Cargo area
CONTROLS
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
▷
▷
Small and light cargo: secure with luggage
straps or, depending on the equipment,
with a cargo net or draw straps.
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
Payload
General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps or cargo nets to the lashing eyes in the
cargo area.
Fixed lashing eyes
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
for securing cargo.
▷
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear seat backrests.
▷
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
Movable lashing eyes
▷
▷
▷
Fold down the rear seat backrests com-
pletely to stow large cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
To secure the cargo there are additional mova-
ble lashing eyes in the cargo area.
301
Cargo area
CONTROLS
The lashing eyes may be located underneath
the cargo area floor. The lashing eyes can be
inserted into the recesses in the rails.
Folding out the multifunction hook
Press on the multifunction hook and turn until
it engages.
To shift the lashing eyes, press the button, ar-
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
the new position.
Hold function for the cargo area
floor
The cargo area floor can be hooked onto the
right multifunction hook.
Multifunction hook
Without storage compartment package:
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
forward.
General information
A multifunction hook is located on the left or
right side in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects from the multi-
function hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo
area must be properly secured.
2. Lift the cargo area floor up until it is over
the multifunction hook.
302
Cargo area
CONTROLS
3. Fold out the multifunction hook.
Storage compartment on
the right side
4. Lower the cargo area floor, arrow 1, until
it is resting on the multifunction hook, ar-
row 2.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a stor-
age compartment is located on the right side.
Opening the storage compartment
With storage compartment package:
1. Fold out the multifunction hook.
2. Lift the cargo area floor.
3. Release the loop from the cargo area floor.
4. Attach the loop, arrow 1, on the multifunc-
tion hook, arrow 2.
Pull the handle.
Storage compartment on
the left side
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Opening the storage compartment
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim panel for fastening small objects.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Pull the handle.
303
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down from the
rear or from the cargo area.
Storage compartment under
the cargo area floor
Safety information
General information
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo area floor.
Warning
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts
jammed when folding down the rear seat
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear seat backrest including
head restraint is clear when folding down.
Opening the storage compartment
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Fold up the cargo area floor.
Closing the storage compartment
Push the cargo area floor downward.
Warning
Through-loading system
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Principle
Depending on the equipment version, the
cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
▷
The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
▷
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position using the cargo
setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and
the center section can be folded down sepa-
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded
down together with the center section.
Warning
Once the rear seat backrest has been folded
down, the locking bracket protrudes into the
car's interior. There is a risk of property dam-
age. When the rear seat backrest is folded
304
Cargo area
CONTROLS
down, pay attention to the protruding locking
bracket and keep this area unobstructed.
Folding down the center section
1. Fold down the center head restraint.
2. Pull lever and fold the center section for-
ward.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
From the rear
Cargo position
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest
forward.
Principle
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position individually. An ad-
justment in several tilt stages is possible as
needed.
From the cargo area
General information
The backrest tilt for the center section is ad-
justed together with the left backrest.
Adjusting
1. Pull the lever and hold it.
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest.
▷
Left lever: fold down the left and middle
rear seat backrest.
▷
Right lever: fold down the right rear seat
backrest.
Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-
tion and engage it.
2. Move the rear seat backrest into an upright
loading position.
After the adjustment, move the backrest
slightly forward or back to engage it correctly.
305
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo cover in the tailgate
1. Pull the cargo cover with both hands by the
outer sides, arrows 1, to disengage it from
the brackets.
Cargo cover
Safety information
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
2. Push the cargo cover upward, arrow 2, and
remove it.
Warning
Cargo cover in the cargo area
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be
thrown about the car's interior such as in the
event of an accident or a braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure the cargo cover
is securely engaged in the brackets.
1. Push the rear edge of the cargo cover up
and out of the side brackets, arrow 1.
Removing the cargo cover
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug-
gage.
2. Remove cargo cover, arrow 2.
306
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Stowing the cargo cover
The individual cargo covers can be removed
and stowed under the cargo area floor when
transporting bulky items.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Stow the cargo cover from the tailgate with
the top side up in the left recess.
3. Stow the cargo cover from the cargo area in
the right recess.
4. Close the cargo area floor completely.
Inserting the cargo cover
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. Make
sure that the cargo covers are positioned cor-
rectly in the brackets and that they clearly en-
gage.
307
